Home

command - Avid Technology

1. 000 ee eee eee 37 Recording Logins 0 cee eae 38 Using Group Security to Control System Access 39 Database Management Monitoring Free Space 0 0 ee 42 Understanding Database Storage Units 43 Monitoring the Free List 0 2 0 0 eee eee 43 Understanding How the System Copies Stories 44 Tracking Database Space over Time 000 cece eee eee 44 Using the hogs Command to Obtain Information 45 Using dbserver and dbfree to Obtain Information 46 Increasing Database Space for Immediate Use 46 Maintaining the Database anaua naaa 48 Checking the Database for Errors 000 eee ee eae 48 Cleaning the Database 0 0 0c ee 50 Cleaning Your Database Offline 2000055 50 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Backing Up the iNEWS System Tape Operations nase ene ai nae taha c eee eee 56 Establishing Policies for Backup Procedures 56 Backing up the INEWS Database 0 000 eee eee 57 The dbdump Command 2 00000 eee eee aes 57 Backing up the Entire Database 0000 eeu 58 Backing up Individual Queues 0 00 eee 60 Notes on Backing up the Database 004 62 Restoring Data to the INEWS Database 00 63 The dbrestore Command aaa cece eee eee 63 Restoring
2. host mcs19 hardware ethernet 00 00 8 20 25 19 fixed address 172 24 96 71 line below because of dual nic cards subnet 10 1 1 0 netmask 255 255 255 0 Do not remove the following line or various programs that require network functionality will fail 127 0 0 1 localhost localdomain localhost iNEWS Servers 123 123 123 95 nrces al al nrcs al local 123 123 123 96 nres bl1 b1 nrcs b1 local 10 2 eT nres a a nrcs a local 10 1 1 2 nres b b nrces b local PCU 10 1 1 10 pculd FTS 123 123 123 54 ftsserver site config r iINEWS Starter host host host ab a net reslist servers servers servers servers servers reslist reslist reslist reslist reslist ab b net reslist servers servers servers servers reslist reslist reslist reslist aa net reslist servers servers servers servers reslist reslist reslist reslist reslist config 10 121 141 231 251 271 281 301 311 321 401 501 20 122 232 252 272 282 302 312 322 601 10 121 141 231 251 271 301 311 401 501 601 201 233 253 273 283 303 313 323 402 504 234 254 274 284 304 314 324 604 20 122 201 236 260 290 310 330 402 504 604 211 235 255 275 285 305 315 325 236 256 276 286 306 316 326 211 241 241 257 277 287 307 317 327 242 258 278 288 308 318 328 245 243 245 259 279 289
3. The diskclear will print a sequence of dots and numbers as it clears the disk For instance on a full 16 gigabyte database the dots and numbers count to 16 000 The diskclear may take some time to complete Step 8 Reconnect the failed server to the survivor After the diskclear has completed you can reconnect the servers Select both all servers on the console and type reconnect lt failed gt master lt survivor gt net ab Depending on which one failed and which one is master you would enter one of the following commands reconnect a master b net ab OR reconnect b master a net ab A few moments after entering the command the failed server will regain its normal named prompt Communication and mirroring between the servers is reestablished 89 Chapter 6 Disconnects Method 1 90 Step 9 Begin copying the database back over to the failed server Select the revived failed server only on the console and begin a diskcopy NRCS B diskcopy Users can continue working while the diskcopy continues in the background The following steps can be performed at any time after the reconnect Step 10 Stop the revived server s network devices PCUs and MCSPCs utility programs such as action servers and sessions on the survivor At this point all devices and sessions are running on the survivor that is master computer even the ones that normally run on the other revived server These devices utilit
4. Do you wish to use the standard English translations and continue n y If a set of dictionaries exceeds the amount of space allotted a message similar to the following appears Table space exceeded by 14 characters No modifications done Restoring Dictionary Defaults You can restore original dictionary default translations without editing the dictionary again Original dictionary files are stored in the tmp dict directory and have a pound symbol prefix such as mcs So even after you have made changes to a dictionary you can restore the standard default translations by copying the appropriate dictionary file from site dict and running the makeccutab and maketab commands again 201 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries To restore standard translations for enter directory and enter queue do the following 1 List files in site dict by running the following 1s command Is site dict A display similar to the following appears ccucmds pcdgidriver ccumsgs pcedgidriver ccumsgs pcflexidriver ccuvideo pceflexidriver ccuvideo pcinfdriver convertvideo pcinfdriver dial pclsfdriver dial pcelsfdriver doac pcqcbdriver doac pceqcbdriver keymacros pcqdeltradriver keymacros pceqdeltadriver mcs pcaqpbdriver mcs pceqpbdriver mctcmds pcsvsdriver mctcmds pcsvsdriver mctmsgs printmsgs mctmsgs printmsgs messages queues messages queues pca72driver shift pca72driver shift
5. dev rp5 0 60000 dev rp6 60001 120123 dev rp7 120124 999999 The numbers reported are the first and last blocks for each partition The last number of the report 999 999 in the example above is the size of the database dbdump lt keys gt lt option gt Dumps individual stories or the entire database to tape This command can be interrupted The program will continue dumping to reach an appropriate quitting point Valid Keys Description a Append to current dump c Create new dump C Create new dump don t ask if it s ok d Dump the news directory i Dump indexed files such as user index s Show quick index of dumped stories v Verbose output x Ask before dumping indexed file 123 Appendix A Command References dbfree 124 Valid Options Description a lt device gt Use alternate device for dump d Dump news directory skeleton no stories f file Dump to file use for standard output m lt minutes gt Dump files modified in last x minutes n lt namelist gt Only dump listed directories N lt computer name gt Network dump to specified computer To dump everything except those directories marked with a skip flag type dbdump c To dump a queue to a new tape add n and the queue name to the command For instance to dump the queue SCRIPTS JUNE 01 to a new tape type dbdump c n scripts june 01 By replacing the c with an a you can add a queue to a tape without erasing
6. EOT Timed out Unknown packet type Input file open error File not found Output file open error Output file write error Output file close error Telex Dictionary site dict telex 234 The Telex dictionary contains commands and messages used with the telex feature Telex Dictionary Standard Name X_0 X_l X_10 X_20 X_36 X_43 X_50 X_61 Translation LINE FREE LINE UNAVAILABLE RING INDICATE CONNECTION MADE INCORRECT AB NO CONNECTION CALL CLEARED INVALID COMMAND Standard Name X_70 X_71 X_72 X_73 X_74 X_75 X_76 X_77 X_81 X_82 X_83 X_DISTRIBUTE X_UNKNOWN X_CMD X_SENT X_ABORT X_BUSY X_NODIAL X_NOCNX X_MORE X_RETRY X_FAIL Telex Dictionary site dict telex Translation SS ABS SS DER SS MON SS NCH SS NP SS NA SS OCC SS NC SS INF SS CIC SS RDI SYSTEM TELEX DISTRIBUTION dead CMD SENT ABORT BUSY NODIAL NOCNX MORE RETRY FAIL 235 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries Standard Name X_MLKUP MMORE MSENT MRETRY X X X X_MFAIL Translation NO LOOKUP ENTRY FOUND SENT OK REMAINING SENDS SENT OK NO CONNECTION RETRIES LEFT FAILED NO MORE RETRIES Dial Dictionary site dict dial 236 The Dial dictionary contains messages used with modems Like other dictionaries the standard name is in uppercase and must not be changed The translation can be in lowercase up
7. When backing up the database onto a tape anything on that tape is overwritten by the new copy of the database 4 Type y to begin copying the database to tape Information similar to the following appears Starting Dump 1 block 0 dumping isam user 3121 stories dumped Ending Dump 1 block 223 As dbdump copies the console displays messages like those above The number of stories dumped and the ending block mentioned in these messages depends on your system When the console prompt returns the backup is done Proceed to step 5 to verify the backup Otherwise remove the tape from the drive Set the tape s write protect switch to the on position return it to its case and write the date on the case label 5 Optional Type dbrestore tdv at the console to verify the backup was complete that everything you wanted backed up was copied to tape The dbrestore tdv console command lists every directory and queue on the tape Since the tape contains most of the database this list is very long To list contents of a tape the server must read the entire tape therefore listing contents takes approximately as long as it does to back up the database to tape 59 Chapter 5 Backing Up the iNEWS System The output of the dbrestore tdv command looks like this Listing tape contents only Type Stories Name Dir Que DEAD Dir SYSTEM Dir SYSTEM KEYBOARDS Que 1 SYSTEM KEYBOARDS 000 INSTALL
8. erickson mccormack arlin 3 users qualified out of a domain of 62 users and were updated Listing Users Who Do Not Have Passwords 300 To check for users who do not have a password from the console type list password u Ensure that you include a space between the and the u The following command lists every user who does not have a password NRCS A list password u user rr kb su mode destination weisman 0 0 0 Modifying User Traits from the Console In the previous example there is one user weisman who does not have a password To find out who has not changed their password within a specified period of time use this form of list u list passchg lt date gt u lt domain gt For instance to list users who have not changed their password in the last 90 days enter list passchg followed by lt and the number of days you want to specify 90 in this case and a period Ending the number with a period indicates the value is in days no period indicates hours There must be no spaces between passchg the lt and the number of days For information on users who have not changed their password within the last 90 days type list passchg lt 90 u A screen similar to the following appears User DEV Date Created Last Login Last Password levy 427 02JAN2004 10 50am24JUL2004 9 03am O6JAN2004 9 50am As you can see in the previous example this produces a listing with e Name of use
9. All users matching 6 users found wet _ Jattare __ _sathean_ _aetee bloyd Brandi Loyd 1 Oct 2003 cjordan Craig Jordan 150ct 2003 no csquire Craig Squire 12 Sep 2003 yes dmitchell Dan Mitchell 22 Aug 2003 yes sbagley Sheila Bagley 10 Oct 2003 yes tmarini Tammy Marini 25 Sep2003 no I New User Modify Remove Simplified ut Copy No template set Close 3 Type an asterisk in the User ID field if it does not already appear The iNEWS system recognizes this as a wildcard and therefore will search the entire database of users 32 The other criteria options available in this dialog box are explained in Chapter 4 of the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Man ual Checking Password Status 4 Click the Advanced button The Advanced Search Settings dialog box appears with All Users selected by default Advanced Search Settings x m Search Criteria Simplified Users Superusers C Non Simplified Users C Non Superusers C Date Range C Blacklisted Users C Non Blacklisted Users Last From Members of Group C Users Without Passwords Cancel 5 Do one of the following gt To search for all users without passwords select Users Without Passwords gt To search for all users who have not changed their password within a specific time select Date Range Then click Password Changed and specify t
10. Programs Invoked by iNEWS The following programs are invoked and used by your iNEWS system Do not use them as commands action bio conf bioserver boot brand cgi fcgi connect sh console copyright disconnect distribution ftsindex ftsseek gnews ismessage keyword license mailserver mct monitor monserver news newsmail NewsWeb fcgi nxserver parallel prtscanner rxnet seek server snews start telex txnet webaccserver workserver Commands Used by Avid Personnel Only 114 The following commands are used by Avid personnel only attach bdump binhex biodebug dblock dbprint dbsize detach msgdebug nsupgrade poke qcheck Linux Commands Used in iNEWS biosleep diddle qstampcheck biostat download qxcheck catcheck finit reat ccuputwire ftsdebug traverse ccuq ifis unjumble ccureset ifmaster userclean ccuspeed ifsu wdump ccutime iftapeis workdebug dbcopy keycheck wxlate dbgen kwdcheck xi dblinks load Linux Commands Used in iNEWS The following Linux commands are available in iNEWS For further information see the reference material that came with your Linux system To obtain command syntax and other usage information type the man command along with the command name For instance to get information about the grep command type man grep cat kill pwd cp more rm date mv sync df passwd telnet grep ps 115 Appendix A Command References Console Control Commands The
11. bscan bpoll ignore del every everyentry extension ignore ignore del mailto number on bscan bpoll ignore del eof all at every everyentry extension ignore ignore del mailto number on Standard name open order poll priority put quiet scan sendform send del validate verify Queues Dictionary site dict queues Translation open order poll priority put quiet scan sendform send del validate verify Queues Dictionary site dict queues The Queues dictionary contains names for system queues such as SYSTEM KEYBOARDS and the Dead queue Queues in this dictionary are used by functions within iNEWS For instance the seek command uses whatever queue translation is given to Q SEEK which is SYSTEM SEEK by default Like other dictionaries the standard name is in uppercase and must not be changed The translation can be in lowercase but appears in upper case on the screen Queue names and their standard translations are shown in the following Queues Dictionary table The 8 bit codes can be defined using 7 bit sequences 223 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries 224 Queues Dictionary Standard Name Q_ACCT Q_ADDRLIST Q_ADDRDIST Q_CATWORDS Q_CLIENT_DOS Q_CLIENT_COM Q_CLIENT _REMOTE_SEARCH Q_CLIENT_COM_VERSIONS Q_CLIENT_RS_VERSIONS Q_CLIENT_WIRE_SERVER Q_CLIENT_WINDOWS Q_CLIENT_VERSIONS Q_CONFIGURE Q DEAD Q DESTINATION Q FLASH Q F
12. n expand font font font font form 7 form 8 form 9 id NRCS lowwater 5000 load 5 lt esc gt s3B lt esc gt s4B lt esc gt amp dD OF WN lt esc gt amp 11H lt esc gt amp 14H net AB defaults if parameter not lt esc gt 0U lt esc gt sp7 0h18vs0b11T lt esc gt amp dD lt esc gt s3B highwater 6250 pausetimeout 0 05 lt esc gt s0B lt esc gt s0B lt esc gt amp d lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt esc gt amp d lt esc gt s0B site printers hplaser1 Courier Bold extra bold junderline bold Under lt esc gt amp 1l00 lt esc gt sl0H lt esc gt s12V lt nul gt landscape j top tray j lower tray purgelimit 5 present these values are assumed unless overridden on the command line auto_upgrade yes clockmax 12 excluded_video none highwater 2500 lastlogin yes load 0 localtimeout 0 00 lowwater 1250 maxhits 500 min_passwd_length 5 msgserver silent pausetimeout 0 30 purgelimit 0 readrate 180 remotetimeout 0 00 scriptlhmax 40 scriptrhmax 40 security or timechar timer verbose wordlength 0 183 Appendix B System Files site wires anpa7 184 oe Z oe oe M 2 5 S1 is D ct oO oe za oe oe 10 oe anpa7 suitable for upi7 ap7 and cupi7 bits start eos category slug map map map map map map map map map map map map map map map map map map map l
13. 6 Press Enter 7 To set the Value data option 279 Appendix F Environment Variables MsgMailAlert 280 gt Right click on the MailLookup value gt Choose Modify from the pop up menu The Edit DWORD Value dialog appears Edit DWORD Value 27x Value name MailLookup Value data m Base fil Hexadecimal C Decimal Cancel gt Set the Value data by typing one of the following options 0 zero show no matches 1 show only user matches 2 show only group alias matches 3 show groups aliases and user matches The default behavior without the Registry value MailLookup defined at a workstation is 3 gt Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box 8 Close the Registry Editor window Enabling the Message Mail Alert feature allows you to change the alert behavior so that the iNEWS Workstation will flash message and or mail alerts on the status bar for only 15 seconds rather than persistently By adding the MsgMailAlert variable you can specify additional settings Environment Variables Registry Values To set the environment variable l Open Registry Editor See To access the Registry Editor on page 274 for more information Navigate to the Environment key and open it Right click on the right side of the Registry Editor window A pop up menu appears Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type DWORD in the Regist
14. Compare FTS index for lt path gt against database content and fix discrepancies Used to bring indexing up to date For instance ftsdebug search adjust archives 2002 Compare FTS index for lt path gt against database content List FTS index entries for lt path gt Checking Communication between iNEWS and FTS Servers 110 Verify communication from the iNEWS Servers to the FTS utility programs running on the Windows based FTS server by using the following forms of the ft sdebug command ftsdebug index stat ftsdebug search stat These commands may also be used to monitor the indexing process iNEWS and FTS Connectivity ftsdebug Command After each command is entered at the console a display of statistics about the utility program either the ftsindex server ft sidx exe or the ftsseek server Etssch exe appears The display will vary depending on which form of the command you used Samples of each are shown in the following two columns NRCS AS ftsdebug index stat Program name ftsidx exe Version 1 5 0 14 FTS Process id 238 Started 07 10 04 09 00 52 Debug value 0 Tuning on Index Base e fts nrcs a Indexed Documents 1458 Requests Serviced 7365 Documents Added 1458 Documents Removed 81301 Documents Replaced 2 Documents Purged 1 NRCS ASftsdebug search stat Program name ftssch exe Version 1 5 0 14 FTS Process id 239 Started 07 10 04 09 00 52 Debug value 0 Index Base e fts nrcs a Ind
15. E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF FO F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt I lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt 176 BO IBM Character Set 250 FA lt nul gt 0 0 251 FB lt nul gt 0 0 252 FC lt nul gt 0 0 253 FD Z 178 B2 254 FE lt nul gt 0 0 255 FF lt nul gt 0 0 267 Appendix E Character Maps dbrestore Character Map Arabic 268 The following is an example of a dbrestore Character map in this case converting characters from ASMO 449 to Arabic Windows 1256 this file maps from ASMO 449 to MS 1256 code page 130 gt 233 131 gt 226 133 gt 224 135 S 23 0 136 gt 234 137 gt 235 138 gt 232 139 gt 239 140 gt 238 147 gt 244 150 gt 251 151 gt 249 172 gt 161 174 gt 171 175 gt 187 187 gt 186 215 218 gt 216 224 227 gt 220 228 gt 225 229 232 gt 227 233 234 gt 236 235 238 gt 240 239 240 gt 245 241 gt 248 242 gt 250 246 gt 161 247 gt 225 194 248 gt 225 195 249 gt 225 197 250 gt 225 199 that s all 219 223 230 237 243 246 e acute ja circumflex ja grave c Cidilla e circumflex e umlaut e grave
16. To print to screen line 10 of the file type 10p To print to screen lines 10 20 type 10 20p To print all lines from the current line to line 20 type 20p To print all lines in the file from line 80 to the end type 80 p To display the current line number type To display the line number of the last line type 335 Appendix H_ The Line Editor ed Searching the File 336 To make the fifth line from the bottom current type 5 When you do not know the line number but you want to locate a line containing a specific word phrase or number you can use the search option The line editor ed will search the file starting at the current line and display the line with the next occurrence of the specified text To search for text 1 Type a forward slash Do not press the spacebar 2 Type the text you want to locate followed by another forward slash 3 Press Enter For instance if you want to find websession in the configuration file type websession websession 900 In the previous example ed found the word websession on line 900 If you want to repeat the search to locate further occurrences of that word type a forward slash and press Enter again For instance websession websession 900 websession 901 websession 903 In the previous example the user repeated the original search command two more times Each time ed responded with the word searched and the line number wh
17. ed leq fi Commands Dictionary site dict ccucmds flash get get all get old go help hold insert block insert character insert mode key kill load keyboard lock login login exit logout logout exit mail mail copy mail reply message fl ge gea geo go he lib ic jim kill loa k loc logi logi e logo logo e ma ma c mar me 219 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries 220 Standard Name message clear message recall monitor move new new bottom new insert new top note clear note recall note save order pack pack all page down page up password pause print publish quit read Translation me c me r mon mov ne ne b nei net noc nor nos or pac pac a pag d pag u pas pau pr publish q rea Standard Name read all read old receive remove replace save script script undo scroll bottom scroll down scroll top scroll up seek send split status clear tab right template recall template save time stamp transmit unlock Commands Dictionary site dict ccucmds Translation reaa rea o receive rem rep sa seri scri u scro b scro d scro t scro u see sen sp st c tar ter te s tis tr unl 221 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries 222 unsplit user video define video step view uns us vid d vid s vie Job List Commands
18. loadtime 0 11 NRCS AS restart 35 W35 14 34 09 Hot to go Job List Commands at bpoll The following section provides a list of commands that can be used in a job list which is created and modified in the database The command s format and description are provided followed by a list of servers that can utilize the command in their job lists at lt hh mm gt Specifies the time of day when a task will take place You can combine this instruction with the keyword on to specify both the day and time for the task Applies to action and tx servers bpoll lt queue name gt lt polling interval gt lt polling durations Works like po11 except it reads stories in the primary queue in reverse direction If the polling interval and duration are not specified a single scan of the primary queue will be done Applies to timed interval action and tx servers 163 Appendix A Command References bscan distribution dup every extension 164 bscan lt queue name gt priority all everyentry Works like scan except it reads stories in the scan queue in reverse chronological order reading the newest stories first This is convenient for very large queues Applies to action and tx servers The priority option forces the action txnet server to interrupt the scan of another queue if the action txnet server receives a mailbox notification The a11 option forces the action txnet server to scan the entire
19. pcavidapdriver telex pcavidapdriver telex pcbcartdriver words pcbcartdriver words pccypherdriver ccucmds pccypherdriver 2 Type cp followed by the pathname of the file you want to copy and the pathname of the file you want to contain the copy For instance cp tmp dict ccucmds site dict ccucmds After you copy the file to site dict complete the procedure for changing a translation 202 Utility Messages Dictionary site dict messages Utility Messages Dictionary site dict messages The site dict messages dictionary holds a number of utility messages displayed in utility programs used by the iNEWS newsroom computer system including messages usually displayed when a user is building a form or creating a keyboard story A few console messages are also included in this dictionary These messages do not contribute to the total size of translations because they are sent to workstations only under special circumstances and with some exceptions the system looks up translations only as they are needed rather than building them into a program Some exceptions include the following messages which are built into programs via the maketab program e M_COMPUTER e M_KEYBAD e M_LASTLOG e M_NOBULKPR e M_ONDEVICE e M_PIOFAIL e M_WIREFAIL e M_WIREIDLE e M_WIRERESUME Some messages defined in dictionary entries on the server that would typically be displayed in the iNEWS client status bar can now have a
20. 309 319 329 244 260 280 290 310 320 330 site config console connect Print Mail Keyword Seek amp FTS Action servers Monitor servers Monitor servers Txnet Rxnet Rxnet Web Access iNEWS sessions net connect Seek amp FTS Action servers Monitor servers Monitor servers Txnet Rxnet Rxnet iNEWS sessions console net connect Print Mail Keyword Seek amp FTS Action servers Monitor servers Txnet Rxnet Web Access iNEWS sessions iNEWS sessions 179 Appendix B System Files 180 host PCUS pcu i peu b b net 10 20 reslist 121 122 servers 141 201 211 servers 231 236 241 245 servers 251 260 servers 271 290 reslist 301 310 reslist 311 330 reslist 401 402 reslist 501 504 reslist 601 604 10 pcu l0 11 18 20 pcu20 21 28 PCU DEVICES i wire wire unused 7 11 9600 anpa7 AP 12 9600 anpa7 AX 13 18 unused 21 28 NETWORK RESOURCES resource 121 console resource 122 net B cS SERVERS server 141 printserver 141 server 201 mailserver 201 server 211 keyword DAA SEEK amp FTS SERVERS server 231 seek 231 server 232 seek 231 server 233 seek 231 server 234 seek 231 server 235 seek 231 keyword seek seek seek seek seek console net connect Print Mail Keyword Seek amp FTS Action servers Monitor servers Txnet Rxnet Web Access iNEWS sessions iNEWS sessions slave printing mailse
21. If PRINTER is displayed but nothing is being printed ensure that the printer is plugged in turned on online and has paper The console assumes a printer is connected to the PC s parallel port where output is sent To cancel a List command while output is printing press any key printing stops and your position in the history moves to the last line sent to the printer Writes all history currently in memory to disk and then disables disk logging You can use it to change log disks Resumes history disk logging after it has been disabled with logclose 117 Appendix A Command References Keyword Explanation logout Logs you out from a remote console To log out press the Escape key and type Logout The remote console displays the PASSWORD prompt and you can then hang up your modem modem Typed at the main console this command logs out a remote console user Before you type this command ensure that the remote console user is not in the middle of an operation The command may be abbreviated typing m or modem will work print number of lines Displays a number of lines of the history on the console screen ail e print followed by a number displays that many lines of the history beginning at the current line e print all displays everything from the current line to the newest line e print with no parameter displays the current line To cancel a print command while it is displaying console history press any key Th
22. NRCS BS list q people palmer new 1 A display similar to the following appears PEOPLE PALMER NEW id 126126 rec quick index LHDM WObfpRmF f id time modified time 25 h disd iaa u a ana 13735 1 May2 17 07 2000 The index value consists of the selected sort field of the story you want to list The quick index qindex value is optional but must be a single word and is not case sensitive For instance to get information for a story called Nomad in the queue PEOPLE SMITH NOTES type list qindex nomad q people smith notes list s p v lt session id gt lt name gt Lists session information such as users currently logged in The p option causes the process id for the controlling session process to be printed The v option causes the IP address for the session to be printed if the session is a network session such as an iNEWS Workstation list lt option gt ul h 1 mJ pJ t r v kuser or group name gt Lists user traits information such as read rate the keyboard description story system setup and preferences and mail and home queues Console Server Commands If no name follows u the command displays information about all users otherwise it displays information about the listed user such as NRCS AS list u v danielmi The verbose result of the command will look something like this user NRCS AS rr kb su m SOEKCVTH sc queues danielmi 180 0 n 1 OEKCVTH sc dest
23. PEOPLE D DANIELMI NOTES home PEOPLE D DANIELMI mail PEOPLE D DANIELMI MAIL The flags rr kb su m SOEKCVTH sc in the header provide current status information The flags are rr Readrate Keyboard Superuser Insert Overstrike Mode Simplified User Can Order Can Enter amp Remove K Can Kill All C Can Connect V Can Video Browse T Can Technical Direct H Can Highlight Read Dn Can Configure Shortcut Toolbar c Can Configure Colors The letters in the header are defined as follows u h u l Home queue Last login Mail queue Preferences Real name Tracking information 145 Appendix A Command References logout 146 u v Verbose output lt option gt list blacklist b user list created gt date 1 lt date2 user list keyboard lt number gt user list lastlog gt date1 lt date2 user list passchg gt date 1 lt date2 user list password user list readrate lt number gt user list session lt number gt user list simplified s user list su n user When using angled brackets gt lt in an option as shown above they must be enclosed within quotation marks The same applies to characters such as the exclamation point and asterisk as shown below list user a Lists all users whose login names begin with the letter a logout lt device gt logout all Logs out a workstation When you use logout it saves the user s work
24. before logging out his or her workstation This command does not log out users in a connect session To log out specific workstations follow the Logout command with the device numbers of the workstations you want to log out For instance to log out workstations 12 34 and 91 type logout 12 34 91 makeccutab Superuser only makemctab makeshift Superuser only Console Server Commands To log out all workstations use logout all Before logging users out always broadcast a warning message and give them a chance to log out on their own makeccutab i sv Builds new dictionary translations into PCU programs To use this command stop all PCUs then become superuser and type makeccutab i For testing the command format is makeccutab f sv filename makeccutab Command Options s Standard translations v Verbose output vv Very verbose show progress plus translations The dictionary definitions are installed into the exc ccu at printer file The file into which the dictionary definitions are installed are exc monitor all configured mcs drivers resident in the exc ccu at directory exc ccu at cmct and all configured mespc drivers resident in the exc ccu tftp mcspc directory The usage for the makemctab is the same as the makeccutab makeshift v ila p r f lt shift file gt filel file2 Manages the case shifting dictionary that iNEWS uses to determine how to convert lowercase characters to their upp
25. dup job list command 164 E echo dialog command 171 edit command 136 edit lock unbusying 100 editing the dictionary file 198 environment variables 273 cccolor 276 delete_notify 290 destinationorder 278 msgmailalert 280 nxserver 291 picolor 282 RXDEBUG 293 RXDEBUGFILE 293 RXSITELISTSZ 293 server 291 showtimingbar 284 synctoserver 288 error checking story 126 errors in the database 48 escape dialog command 171 every job list command 164 expect dialog command 172 F fast text search FTS 109 111 fgrep command 105 Index first level directory restoring from tape 64 force console command 33 35 137 298 forcing password changes 34 free blocks 72 free list add space from Dead queue 130 high water mark 43 introduction 43 low water mark 43 rebuild 133 size 124 free space 72 FTS servers 109 checking communication 110 ftsdebug format 109 ftsidx exe 109 ftssch exe 109 fullform job list command 169 function key console control command 117 G grep 49 group security controlling system access 39 designing 39 groups managing from console 329 grpcheck command 137 gtraits command syntax 137 H help console command 138 HEOL dialog command 172 history command bottom 116 list 117 print 118 347 Index top 118 up 119 hogs command 45 138 lerrs input errors 109 ignore command 165 ignore del job list command 165 increasing database space 46 iNEWS checking server communication 110 integra
26. information already on the tape For instance to append SCRIPTS JUNE 10 to a tape type dbdump a n scripts june 10 Dumps already on the tape are skipped and this dump is added to the end dbfree cf Reports the size of the database and the size of the free list that is the amount of free blocks available To display this information type dbfree A message similar to the following appears data base size 4106240 free 72600 18 freelist 2904 dblines Console Server Commands The freelist is compressed so there can be as many as 5000 free blocks accounted for in each freelist block To display the amount of free space in your software area type df Prior to the system being configured there are two maintenance options that may used with the dbfree command The format is dbfree cf The c option is used to check for cleared free blocks The f option is used to unclear cleared free blocks dblines b c f n aqJ os_ v S S 0 lt pathname gt Checks the database for story errors Valid Keys Description b Story block count only no checking c Complete check f Compare fields in story form with fields in story Report those not found in both n Do not fix errors O Do not report orphaned story record errors q List queue names s Skip queues that are skipped by dbdump S Fix script related errors S Skip not report script related errors v Verbose output w Check word
27. list uchecks members of that group and then reports those that have not changed their passwords in the specified period of time Once you have set a policy on how often people must change their passwords use list u regularly to ensure that no one forgets to do this within the prescribed period of time If one or more users do not change their passwords often enough use the force command to force them to do so See Changing a Users Password on page G 298 for more information User Traits Console Command Summary 304 The following User Traits Summary table is a summary of iNEWS user traits The first column shows the trait name as it appears in the Modify User Account dialog box which is explained in detail in Chapter 4 of the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual The second column lists actual commands for assigning or removing each trait The third column contains an explanation of the trait and example of utraits console command lines User Traits Console Command Summary User Traits Summary Name in Modify Utrait Console Definition Example User Account Command dialog box Superuser sun su The user has superuser privileges Blacklisted b b The user cannot log in to the iNEWS Simplified ene system as The user has limitations as defined by the Simplified User Settings Examples utraits palmer su n utraits palmer su utraits palmer b utraits palmer s Insert editmode i Ever
28. lt number_of_blocks gt readrate lt number of words per minute gt id lt system name gt remotetimeout lt mm ss gt 121 Appendix A Command References dbclean dbclose 122 lastlogin lt yes no gt scriptlhmax lt number of columns gt load lt number gt scriptrhmax lt number of columns gt localtimeout lt mm ss gt security lt and or gt lowwater lt number_of_blocks gt single lt name gt or net lt name name name name gt master lt a b c d gt timechar lt character gt maxhits lt number gt timer lt silent verbose gt min_passwd_length lt number gt wordlength lt number gt dbclean x lt directory name gt When starting up after a power failure use dbclean to remove any edit or order locks in the database Run the command before startup or log everyone off the system by typing logout all before issuing this command The most common usage of dbclean scans all queues except those marked with the skip flag To use this command after logging out all the users type NRCS AS logout all NRCS AS dbclean x dbclose Closes the database If you use this command while users are active changes to stories will be lost dbdev dbdump Console Server Commands dbdev Reports the disk partitions in use and the number of blocks allocated for the database on each disk partition To find out the size of your database type dbdev A message similar to the following appears
29. websession 900 a inws 511 1 gnews A inws In the above example the user searches for websession and ed responds by displaying the first line found containing that word The user types a presses Enter to start the append operation and types information to be inserted in the file after the displayed line The user then types a period on a line by itself which is very important because it terminates the append operation Without it successive lines typed by the user would be added to the file The Change command replaces the entire contents of the line addressed For instance 21 terminal 13 9600 8n 1 news c not used In the above example the user selects line 21 and ed responds by displaying line 21 The user types c on one line to start the change operation On the second line the user types replacement text and presses Enter followed by a period on a line by itself The period is very important because it terminates the change operation Without it successive lines typed by the user would be added to the file The Delete command is used to delete the line s specified For instance 27d Deletes line 27 30 35d Deletes lines 30 through 35 40 d Deletes every line from 40 to the end of the file After each Delete command as well as after the Append Change and Insert commands the file s lines are renumbered For instance if you delete line 27 then delete line 30 you actually delete the lin
30. 0 t Gate Ae el Os io tliat de Eile AC a agit Zoek 2 276 DestinationOrder 2 0 eee ene 278 MailLOokuUp sc ev eh ce eee lad Re EE Deel ee ee 279 MegMalAlem ce di rene a ont Want ee SoM ete Lt 280 PICIO 22 8th enia edad etd eo eee a i ee tee 282 RGB Hexadecimal Color Chart 0 0 00 eee eee 283 ShowTimingBar 00 eee 284 SCal GOES reae enye Set At es ee oad boo tenet be Yd 285 SYNCTOSCIVER crs ok Naan hee eS ea nee PASEA 288 Delete Notify snc ten icine wets bitin eee Gaga dee 290 Environmental Variables for Servers 0 0 0 0 eee eens 291 Managing Traits at the Console Viewing User Traits from the Console 0000 eee eee 296 Modifying User Traits from the Console 000 000 297 Changing a Users Password 0 00 c eee eee eee 298 Listing Users Who Do Not Have Passwords 300 User Traits Console Command Summary 20 0000 304 User Traits Summary nnana 0 000 eee ee eee 305 Managing Database Traits from the Console 309 Getting Basic Information 000 c eee eee 309 Getting Detailed Information 000 000 eee eee 310 Changing Database Traits from the Console 311 Changing a Parent Directory Only 0002 0c eee 311 Database Traits Console Command Summary 4 312 Database Traits Summary 0 00 cee eee eee 312 SOMPIOIG fess cctv ok e eb ee ew A aba
31. 157 929 6 160 548 6 167 404 6 198 477 6 201 531 6 223 211 6 249 280 6 269 195 6 317 158 6 317 515 6 330 369 6 351 557 6 353 862 6 357 047 6 392 710 6 404 435 6 407 775 6 417 891 6 426 778 6 449 019 6 473 094 6 477 271 6 489 969 6 512 522 6 532 043 6 539 163 D396 853 D398 912 Additional U S and foreign patents pending No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording for any purpose without the express written permission of Avid Technology Inc Copyright 2004 Avid Technology Inc and its licensors All rights reserved Printed in USA The following disclaimer is required by Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics Inc for the use of their TIFF library Copyright 1988 1997 Sam Leffler Copyright 1991 1997 Silicon Graphics Inc Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software i e the TIFF library and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that i the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation and ii the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPL
32. 34 To force an individual user to change his or her password 1 Select Tools gt Options gt Users The Manage User Accounts dialog box appears Type the user name in the User ID field Click Search Select the user name when it appears in the dialog box Click Modify nA A U N Tracking User Activity The Modify User Account dialog box appears UserID danielmi User Name Daniel Mitchell Type Edit Mode Queues I Superuser Insert Home PEOPLE D DANIELMI T Blacklisted C Overwrite Destination PEOPLE D DANIELMI NOTES Mail PEOPLE D DANIELMI MAIL MV Simplified Read Rate i95 Session Features r Configuration Features r Queue Features I Media Browse M Toolbars MV Reorder Stories V Broadcast Control IV Color Highlights I Create Kill Folders Queues I Connect Services IV Highlight Read Stories T Kill All Stories m Password User Preferences Password I Force Change Cancel Get fron 6 Check the Force Change box 7 Click OK The next time the user logs in he or she will be required to choose a new password Tracking User Activity Keep a record of who uses iNEWS and when they use it by following the procedures described in this section These security measures can ensure that there is no unauthorized use of your system At an iNEWS Workstation you can determine e Last login date of one or more user accounts e D
33. 6am 7 monitor 800 cg cg casvr update ca cg C AMNEWS 500 599 cart cart casvr2 update ca cart 3 show cutins 725 show cutins monitor 900 cg cg casvr update ca cg C AMNEWS 700 750 cart cart casvr2 update ca cart 3 show noon rundown show noon monitor 1400 cg cg casvr update ca cg C AMNEWS 800 899 cart cart casvr2 update ca cart 3 show 6pm rundown show 6pm z monitor 2100 cg cg casvr update ca cg C PMNEWS 500 599 cart cart casvr2 update ca cart 3 show 11pm rundown show 11pm monitor 0300 cg cg casvr update ca cg C PMNEWS 500 599 cart cart casvr2 update ca cart 3 show updates rundown show updates monitor 0100 cg cg casvr update ca cg C PMNEWS 800 850 cart cart casvr2 update ca cart 3 show special rundown show special monitor 0200 cg cg casvr update ca cg C PMNEWS 4000 4100 cart show 1100 cg 599 cart show 2200 cg 899 cart show 1100 cg 850 cart cart casvr2 sat am rundown cg casvr cart casvr2 sports sat rundown show sports sat cg casvr cart casvr2 Sat am cut in 1 cg casvr cart casvr2 update show sat am update update update update show sat am update update ca cart ca cg ca cart ca cg ca cart ca cg ca cart SYSTEM MAP monitor C PMNEWS 500 monitor C PMNEWS 800 monitor C AMNEWS 800 189 Appendix B System Files SYSTEM RESOURCE Dev Style Temp
34. A sh hogs mail lt your username gt amp 45 Chapter 4 Database Management For more examples on how to use the hogs command see Appendix A on page 138 Using dbserver and dbfree to Obtain Information To obtain an accurate idea of how much space is being used by stories in the system 1 Empty out the Dead queue and reclaim all space used in it Type dbserver 16000000 You must run dbserver when other programs like dbpurge are not running 2 The next day or after completion run the dbfree program to see how much space is being devoted to functions in your newsroom you consider critical 3 Repeat this process from time to time so you are aware of trends in space usage Use the information to make decisions on projected storage needs and how space is used Increasing Database Space for Immediate Use If your database has not reached the Low on Space point but you want to increase free space for immediate use do the following 1 Type the db free command NRCS AS dbfree data base size 4194304 free 224159 0 freelist 769 The dbfree command used by a system operator or a superuser displays database size free list size and percentage of remaining database available The freelist number indicates how many database blocks are used to hold the free list The free list is compressed This results in anywhere from 250 to 5 000 free block 46 Increasing Database Space for Immediate Use numb
35. AVID 800 800 2843 For Broadcast On Air Sites and Call Letter Stations call 800 NEWSDNG 800 639 7364 With the Syntax of Console Commands If you are at the console and are unsure about the function of a console command use the help command To view instructions about using a command type help followed by the name of the command For instance type help dbvisit for an explanation of the dbvisit command The following data appears dbvisit lt d or v or i gt r or m name s block x for read only s for slow to eliminate cache usage m for machine name to disconnect i to just validate isam files Because of the margin limitations of this manual console command lines may appear wrapped to multiple lines This does not necessarily indicate the need to press an Enter key Unless otherwise indicated console commands should be typed on a single line allowing the computer to wrap the text whenever the command line stretches beyond the screen margin See Console Control Commands on page 116 for more information Also see the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual Types of Console Commands on page 28 Using This Guide Related Information The following documents provide more information about the INEWS newsroom computer system iNEWS NRCS Prep Installation and Upgrade Manual e iNEWS NRCS Training Guide i1NEWS NRCS Release Notes The following
36. Backing Up the iNEWS System Checking for Free Space on a Database For information on selecting a server see Chapter 2 of the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual 72 To check free space on a database 1 Select a server 2 Type dbfree A message similar to the following appears data base size 4194304 free 224159 5 freelist 769 In the previous message example the freelist item indicates how many database blocks are used to hold the free list The freelist is compressed You should have 10 free blocks for each story you want to restore For instance if you expect to find 10 stories to restore you should have 100 free blocks Add extra space to the free list before conducting a search because the search may find and restore more stories than you expect Adding Blocks to the Free List To add 100 blocks to the free list 1 Select the master computer typically server A 2 Type dbserver 224259 The number after dbserver must be the sum of the additional blocks and the free blocks from dbfree A message similar to the following appears NRCS A Sat Jul24 10 29 26 2004 dbserver complete exiting At this message dbserver is finished and you may proceed You can run dbfree again to verify that you have enough space Disaster Recovery Planning Restoring the Database When a story being restored has more than 1 000 lines the following message is display
37. Bad Map line Duplicate device Bad Map line Invalid drive specification Bad Map line Invalid video channel assignment policy Bad Map line Unrecognized MOS parameter Bad Map line MOS device not assigned to MOS Server Bad Map line device server type mismatch Invalid MOS item Bad Resource line Duplicate style entry Bad Resource line Invalid CG fields Bad Resource line Invalid arg count Bad Resource line Invalid CG template Standard Name A_RESERRORS A_INVLDEV A_INVLSTYLE A_INVLADD A_INVLARG A_XMAXADD A_NOFORM A_SRTERR A_DELERR A_DIRERR A_QUEERR A_QUEAPPERR A_STRYERR A_STRYCRT A_STRYWRT A_DRVNOTINMAP A_DRVNCONFIG A_DRVNOCOMM A_DEVBUSY A_NOSSADDR MCS Dictionary site dict mcs Translation Following errors found in resource story Invalid device specification Invalid style Invalid address Missing argument Exceeded address range Cannot access form Error sorting queue Cannot delete from Directory open error Queue open error Queue append error Story open error Story create error Story write error Driver not in Map Download failed driver not configured Network connect failed Refused connection request No SS address specified 245 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries 246 A_MULSSADDR Multiple SS addresses specified A_MONEXIT Monitor exiting A_QUITTIME Quite Time reached A_MUSTUNLOAD Must first unload A_READY OK
38. Bl lt nul gt 0 0 178 B2 lt nul gt 0 0 179 B3 lt nul gt 0 0 180 B4 lt nul gt 0 0 263 Appendix E Character Maps 181 B5 lt nul gt 182 B6 lt nul gt 183 B7 lt nul gt 184 B8 lt nul gt 185 B9 lt nul gt 186 BA lt nul gt 187 BB lt nul gt 188 BC lt nul gt 189 BD lt nul gt 190 BE lt nul gt 191 BF lt nul gt 192 CO lt nul gt 193 Cl lt nul gt 194 C2 lt nul gt 195 C3 lt nul gt 196 C4 lt nul gt 197 C5 lt nul gt 198 C6 lt nul gt 199 C7 lt nul gt 200 C8 lt nul gt 201 C9 lt nul gt 202 CA lt nul gt 203 CB lt nul gt 264 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 CC CD CE CF DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF EO E1 E2 lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt lt nul gt 223 IBM Character Set DF 265 Appendix E Character Maps 266 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8
39. Dumps a complete image of the software area of the disk to tape You must be a superuser to backup the root disk With the exception of f the options for sof tdump are the same as the sitedump command softrestore d lt device gt ehtv lt pattern gt This function must be performed from single user mode Restoring an old or inaccurate version of the data may cause functionality problems Use this command only when advised to do so by Avid personnel to restore the software area of the disk from a soft dump tape You must be a superuser to restore the root disk softrestore Command Options d lt device gt is the name of a tape device The actual device name used will be dev lt device gt The default is dev tape e Eject tape when done h Help show usage information t Show table of contents no files are created 157 Appendix A Command References startup status 158 V Verbose lt pattern gt Select only files with names that match pattern startup Starts the system s devices after they have been shut down The system must be offline and all devices must be stopped status all license Displays system connection information which server is the master if system is running single or dual and the disk status There are three disk statuses e OK When the system is up and running either as dual or single e Cleared When you have cleared the database of a failed serve
40. E Character Maps 272 Appendix F Environment Variables Some features in the Avid INEWS newsroom computer system require the system administrator to set up environment variables in the Registry of the workstations The person responsible for setting up these variables should have a good understanding of Windows based operating systems and the Registry Editor program This appendix includes the following sections e Registry Editor Environment Variables Registry Values e Environmental Variables for Servers Appendix F Environment Variables Registry Editor The Registry Editor is used to create and define environment variables Registry values at each workstation Environment Variables To access the Registry Editor 1 Click the Start button on the Windows Taskbar 2 Select the Run option 3 Type regedit in the dialog box that appears 4 The Registry Editor window appears amp Registry Editor Registry Edit View Help a Lsa Nam Data m MediaProperties aby value not set Ej sa MediaResources ab ComSpec ZSystemRoot system32 cmd exe H NetworkProvider MSINPUT C Program Files Microsoft Hardware m Nis NUMBER_OF_PR 1 m Print os windows _NT a Seal Os2LibPath ZS ustemRoot systema2 os2 dl Path ZS ystemR oot system32 S pstemR oat D PROGR HI SecurePipeServers H SecurityProviders E ServiceGroupOrder H ServiceProvider J Session Manager H E AppPatches DOS Devices PROCESS
41. Errors Sent to MCT Only Driver Errors Sent to MCT and Possibly to Console amp Mon User e Driver Errors Sent to User Only e Status Reported in Device Status Field The standard name is in uppercase and must not be changed The translation can be in lowercase uppercase or mixed case Device Types Used by Monitor Servers and Drivers Standard Name Translation A_CART CART MCS Dictionary site dict mcs A_CG A_MOS A_USRDEF A_CART CG MOS SS USRDEF CART Special Strings Recognized by the Monitor Server A_BREAK A_CHANNELOPEN A_CHANNELCLOSE A_CMDDEL A_COMDEL A_CURRENT A_FLDDEL A_LOCALHYPHEN A_NOUPDT A_UPDATE noupdate update Error Messages for the Monitor Server A_MBINVL Invalid mailbox 243 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries 244 Standard Name A_NOTINMAP A_XMAXSTORY A_MAPOPENERR A_RESOPENERR A_NOSERVER A_BADCG A_BADMCT A_BADMAPARG A_BADMAPUPDT A_BADMAPQTME A_BADMAPDUPE A_BADMAPDRV A_BADMAPINVCHAN A_BADMAPBADMOS A_BADMAPNOMOS A_BADMAPBADSVR A_BADMOSITEM A_BADDUPENTRY A_BADCGLINES A_BADRESARG A_BADCGTMPL Translation Queue not in map Exceeded max stories monitor exiting Map story open error Resource story open error Server cannot execute Bad Map line CG device requires range Bad Map line Invalid MCT template Bad Map line Invalid arg count Bad Map line Expected update arg Bad Map line Invalid time value
42. Improper use of reserved word 209 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries 210 Standard Name M_GRPNOSTORY M_GRPNOQ M_GRPFLODEF M_GRPFLONEW M_GRPFLSOLD M_GRPFLLONG M_GRPOK M_GRPBAD M_GRPSOSO M_GRPNOSOUSER M_GRPCHOWNFAILED Wire Program Messages Standard Name M_WIREFAIL M_WIREIDLE M_WIRERESUME Translation Failed to open story Failed to open queue Cannot open default aliases file Cannot open new aliases file Cannot save old aliases file more than 50 000 alias names created GROUPS story OK GROUPS story NOT OK GROUPS story accepted with errors Lookup of so user in passwd file failed Could not change ownership of mail alias file Translation HOST CCU COMMUNICATION ERROR wire has been idle for 1wire received story was idle for Seek Server Messages are also used by ftsseek Utility Messages Dictionary site dict messages Mail Server Messages M_MAILSYNTAX Can t send mail no address M_MAILNOREC Unable to receive mail from M_MAILQUEUE Can t return mail bad mail queue Validation Action Server M_VALID Story valid M_INVALID Story invalid M_VMOVEDTO Story invalid Moved to Seek Server Messages M_BGSNSCHP No search path M_BGSNRESP No results path M_BGSSCHTP Invalid Search Type M_BGSIKWEX Invalid keyword expression M_BGSSPDNE Search Path does not exist M_BGSRQDNE Results Queue does not exist 211 Appendix C Standard Di
43. PC Since they may be logged in to the server containing the non master database that will be erased this will give them a backup copy which could be re imported if necessary A When the servers disconnect stories written on server A are not mirrored to server B and stories saved on B are not mirrored to A The system issues a popup to alert users who must contact their system administrator immediately Detecting a Disconnect You can check to see if the servers are connected to each other and mirroring at any time using the status command at the console If they are connected and properly mirroring they will both agree on the system status and it will report that the system is dual AB System is AB See Types of Disconnect on page 82 for more information If the servers disconnect a disconnect warning message appears on the console Similar warnings appear on the console for other servers in the system of each server 81 Chapter 6 Disconnects On the Linux platform the messages include detailed information from the driver mp that controls the mirroring Jul 13 07 45 44 nrcs a IO handler B silent for 30 seconds Jul 13 07 45 44 nrcs a IO handler LINK TO B FAILED DISCONNECTING B Jul 13 07 46 05 nrcs a msg 66 to server on computer A Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S508 15028 monitor 508 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S510 15029 monitor 510 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S23
44. Services Connect services are utilities you can set up to enable iNEWS users to connect to other computers or information services over the network such as a remote console for your INEWS newsroom computer system This chapter contains the following main sections e Network Services e Adding System Services e Console Connect Sessions e Serial Connect Services Chapter 2 Connect Services Network Services It is useful to set up a service to allow you to connect to your INEWS Servers For instance setting up network remote connect services allows you to perform many administrative tasks from your INEWS Workstation rather than at the console Dialogs for Connect Services A dialog is a script that tells the service what prompts to expect from the device it connects to and provides the service with appropriate responses for each prompt Using any service involves some routine activities such as logging in that you do each time you use that service You can create a dialog for any service to handle these routine activities Building a Dialog 20 This section explains how to design and create a simple dialog that logs a user in to an information service Once logged in the dialog yields control to the user until he she is ready to close the connection Then the dialog logs the user out of the service and closes the connection When you design a dialog it is helpful to turn on the capture connect command and perform the proc
45. TaskS 22 200 cece eee eee 14 Security LASKS ye vende ate ee eeu E dea aie a 15 Customizing the System 0 000 eee 15 Storage Maintenance Tasks 00 eee eee eee 15 Device Tasks 2 03 gan ee ev te ee PoP eee ee eS be ees 16 Reviewing Default Settings 00 000 eee 17 Troubleshooting aeos kies ire Ea e EE eee eee 17 Connect Services Network Services 0 00 teas 20 Dialogs for Connect Services 0 000 cee eee eee 20 Building a Dialog 22 2 000 c eee tees 20 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Dialog Commands 000 cee ee eee 22 Dialog Examples 0 0 c cece eae 22 Adding System ServiceS 0 0 0 tees 23 Setting up the Service 0 00 eee eee 23 Console Connect Sessions 0 00000 eee eee ee eee 27 Serial Connect Services 20 0000 eee eee eee eee 28 Database Security Establishing Security Procedures 0 00 c eee eee ee 30 User Passwords ie creser ccd ee ee ee ee ee 31 Checking Password StatuS 00 0000 eee eee 31 Forcing Individual Users to Change Their Passwords 34 Atan iNEWS Workstation 00 0200 eee 34 Tracking User Activity 2 0 0 0 eee 35 Tracking User Login Activity and Date Created 36 Atan iNEWS Workstation 000000 cee eae 36 iui AE Console aed reed de had eed de head oe ee ens 36 Listing Users Currently Logged in
46. You may need to consult your printout of the site config file to determine which server and session numbers must be stopped They are the numbers in the host ab b section Ensure that you stop all of the failed server s utility programs action txnet rxnet and special servers that are currently running on the survivor On larger systems logging off and stopping half of the devices utility programs such as action servers and sessions is sometimes more difficult and time consuming than simply logging everyone off and stopping all devices Rather than hunting through the site config file and determining which sessions and devices belong to the failed server it may be quicker to schedule a time to bump everyone off Alternatively if you have the opportunity to schedule a time to log the users off and stop the devices you can opt for the second method and instead run the following sequence of commands on the survivor NRCS A offline NRCS A logout all NRCS A stop all Step 11 Reboot the PCUs MCSPCs that you have stopped Rebooting the network devices before getting them restarted ensures the devices come up cleanly 91 Chapter 6 Disconnects 92 Step 12 Reconfigure the system survivor The system is now running in a dual AB configuration When you run the configure command the system will reconsult the site config file and divide responsibility for which server will run the devices half for server A and half
47. a number For instance down 160 will search for the number 160 instead of moving down 160 lines 116 Keyword Exit Function function key number definition list of lines all logclose logopen Console Control Commands Explanation To leave the console program and return to the MS DOS prompt 1 Press the Command key 2 Press Ctrl E 3 Press Enter You cannot type exit at the Command prompt Type console at the prompt to restart the console program Assigns a command to a console function key For instance to assign the list s command to the F9 key type 9 1list s To include Command and Enter keys in a function key definition use braces For instance to include those keystrokes in the previous assignment example type 9 list s To list the current assignment of a function key type the key number by itself plus Enter on the command line The valid range is 1 14 Avid recommends no definition be made for F14 which defaults to the Command key F13 corresponds to the plus key on the numeric keypad Sends some number of lines of the history to the printer attached to the console multiplexor e list followed by a number such as list 3 prints that many lines of the history beginning at the current line e list all prints everything from the current line to the newest line e list with no parameter prints the current line When using list the word PRINTER appears on the command line
48. a specified time For instance You must use 24 hour military time Maintaining the Database 1 Enter superuser mode on the master computer 2 Get the current time using the date command NRCS A date Sat Jul 10 11 05 07 EDT 2004 3 Set the schedule such as 5 minutes later using the at command NRCS A at 11 10 4 Type the dblines command line exc dblines gt tmp dblines log lt Ctr1 D gt Pressing Ctrl D after entering the command line marks the end of commands to be executed according to the at schedule Afterwards the server prompt returns to the original prompt showing the server name such as NRCS A If you want the system to fix script related errors such as story scripted flag set story unscripted you can use the S option For instance exc dblines S gt tmp dblines log If you want the system to ignore story script errors and not report them you can use the S option For instance exc dblines S gt tmp dblines log After the dblines is complete you can check the log file for error messages by using the grep command NRCS A grep failed temp dblines log This searches the log file for the word failed If there are no errors involving queue corruption such as lt queue gt scan failed lt queue gt read error orunable to open lt queues the prompt will simply be returned If there are any error messages related to queue corruption call Avid Customer Support for assistance If yo
49. all future files in the minimal dbdump You may list up to 10 directories and queues with the n option of the dbdump program NRCS A dbdump ci d n system shows assignments In case of disaster this minimal dbdump would be the first tape restored to the system Since it will not contain many stories to dbdump to or dbrestore from this tape is relatively quick and users can resume work while the remainder of the material trickles in from the full dbdump tape This minimal dbdump tape should be updated periodically Backing up Software Your system uses programs and site dependent configuration files called site files to adapt it to your newsroom operations and run the workstations printers wires and other devices These programs and site files make your system software unique from that found in any other newsroom It is important you keep a current copy of your software on tape in case you need to restore the software area of the disk Anytime you make major changes to the system software such as extracting new programs from an update tape make a new software backup Likewise when you make major changes to a site file update the software backup to include these changes For instance if you add a new workstation to your system you define that workstation in the configuration file This represents an important change to this site file so after modifying this file update your software backup tape 75 Chapter 5 Backing
50. and or record sizes of any ISAM files changed for the new software release Scans the database for errors then rebuilds the free list and fixes bad story link counts A list of block numbers can be specified as shown by the block parameter above A diagnostic is printed whenever dbvisit encounters one of the specified blocks which is helpful for tracking down database corruption Use dbvisit once a month as a part of your regular maintenance There are two ways to run dbvisit 133 Appendix A Command References dial 134 e Without the m option The system must be offline and shut down No one can log in until dbvisit is complete e With the m option Specify a machine that will be running dbvisit The system must be offline and shutdown only long enough to enter the dbvisit command Remaining machines can be brought up for users to log into After the dbvisit procedure is complete the machine running dbvisit can be reconnected following the normal procedure Before you run dbvisit ensure the system is offline all PCUs are stopped and the system is shut down If dbvisit reports any errors do not rebuild the free list call Avid Customer Support for assistance dial p lt port gt i lt devid gt o lt options gt b cldle q s t m lt modem gt n lt phone gt This command makes a connection between a workstation and a modem passing data in both directions Use it only in the service table not from the
51. as Open Media Framework OMF Avid systems accept media in more than 30 other file formats allowing them to accept use track and present any media images graphics audio scripts or notes System Administrator Tasks Basic Tasks The following sections introduce many system administrator responsibilities and the system s capabilities and functions Before you can customize or maintain the iINEWS newsroom computer system you must learn several basic tasks which include Start up or shut down iNEWS NRCS which includes logging out users and taking the system offline 13 Chapter 1 Introduction User Tasks e Backing up a site file before making file modifications Send system administrator commands from the console to one or more of your system s computers e Bea console superuser capable of setting up special superuser permissions A user is anyone who can log in to the database and use iINEWS NRCS Your responsibilities regarding users are e Monitor user information such as users access privileges and which users are currently logged in e Customize the traits of users accounts to enable users to more effectively use the system e Provide a new employee access to the information stored in the iNEWS NRCS database by creating a new user account e Remove user accounts of former employees to prevent improper access to the iINEWS NRCS database Database Tasks 14 The iNEWS system databas
52. configuration file for any errors connect Console Server Commands For instance suppose you made changes to PCUs 10 and 20 which are connected to server A in an AB system To test these changes become a superuser and type NRCS A configure site config ab a Ifno lt config file gt is specified site config is used If a service has been added to a database story in SYSTEM SERVICE use configure s so the service can be recognized If an Ethernet or Internet address has been added to a database story in the SYSTEM CLIENT WINDOWS directory use configure n to validate the address and allow it to be recognized by the system In both cases you must first take the system offline enter the configure command then put the system back online connect lt name gt lt option gt lt value gt The connect command names each server in the system and tells each how many other servers there are in the system and how to communicate with them For instance NRCS AS connect a net ab The connect command reads the site systenm file for options If an option is specified on the command line and also in the site system file the command line setting takes precedence connect Command Options auto_upgrade lt yes no gt msgserver lt silent verbose gt clockmax 12 24 name lt a b c d gt disk lt status gt pausetimeout lt mm ss gt excludedvideo director none _ purgelimit lt number of hours gt highwater
53. console dial Command Options b Binary data C Check evidence of modem d Direct no modem e Echo i Device ID for a direct line device m Modem type n Phone number 0 Communications options p Port number q Allow user to quit with Control lt space gt S Special device dictionary diskclear Superuser only Console Server Commands t Touch tone dictionary update lt dictionary gt lt directory gt Any combination of dictionary names and dictionary directories can be specified For each directory specified all dictionaries within that directory will be compared to their standard dictionary counterpart Only missing and obsolete dictionary tokens are identified definitions are not compared The standard dictionary name begins with a pound sign and is expected to reside in the same directory A dictionary update is only done when the update flag is specified otherwise the dictionary is only checked by default Any tokens found in the standard dictionary that are missing from the dictionary will be added and those found in the dictionary that are missing from the standard dictionary will be removed diskclear u Marks each block of a server s database as invalid so that you can copy a new database to the disk To clear the disk select a server and type diskclear Do this prior to connecting a replacement server to a running system Using this command erases the server s entire da
54. dbtraits rundown 5pm t The format of the sort field information is SRPlo LIsUG QSXWFIT sortfield This trait shows by which form field a sorted queue is sorted A letter representing the form field appears in this position in the trait listing A hyphen here means that no sort field has been set The system automatically uses the title field as the sort field 321 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console 322 This trait also determines which form field the computer searches during fast finds In addition the cursor is placed on this form field when a user displays stories in a queue Do not confuse this trait with the sorted queue trait which determines whether the queue is sorted at all Changing a Queue s Sort Field Perform this procedure at a time of low system usage because the dbsort command can impair system performance while it is running To change a queue s sort field from the console 1 Esure no users are in the queue Changing a queue s sort field does not affect what is seen by users already in the queue If they try to use a displayed out of date sort field it could cause confusion 2 Use dbtraits to set the queue s sort field dbtraits lt queue name gt sortfield lt field name gt If the queue is not already sorted include so at the end of the command to turn on its sorted trait For instance dbtraits rundowns 5pm sortfield page number so Turn on the sorted option so be
55. devices 1 Change the value for the W_LOGTYPES token in the dictionary site dict words A typical definition for this token might look like this W_LOGTYPES G Each letter in the W_LOGTYPES value represents a different type of device that can log in on an iNEWS newsroom computer system 2 To track logins by device type add the appropriate letter to the W_LOGTYPES value Use the following letters G iNEWS Workstation Web sessions c COM T Remote search For instance to track logins from all devices on your system change the W_LOGTYPES line to look like this W_LOGTYPES GBer The letters can appear in any order On a busy system this can create a large amount of console activity 3 When a user logs in at a device of a type listed in W_LOGTYPES a message similar to the following is sent to the console G602 12 04 34 Login arlin 192 168 1 100 2 0 0 157 Using Group Security to Control System Access This message includes the device type and number time of login user name IP address of PC used and client version number 4 A logout message similar to the following is sent to the console when the user logs out G602 12 21 52 Logout arlin 192 168 1 100 2 0 0 157 A failed login that is an invalid user name or password produces a message similar to this G602 12 04 34 attempted login arlin 192 168 1 100 2 0 0 157 Regardless of the W_LOGTYPES value a message is always sent to the console when a superuse
56. dictionary contains translations for a variety of miscellaneous words used by the system For instance words regarding priority such as flash and silent or print options such as story and script are included Standard names are in uppercase and must not be changed Because many messages in this dictionary are displayed in the upper right corner of active stories and rundowns keep them short to avoid overwriting por tions of the story or rundown Translations can be uppercase lowercase or mixed case Words Dictionary Standard Name Wire Priorities and Options W_FLASH W_BULLETIN W_WIRE_ FORM W_URGENT W_SILENT W_ALWAYS W_TRANSMIT Translation FLASH BULLETIN wires URGENT SILENT A TRANSMIT Standard Name Status Types W_HOLD W_LOCKED W_MAIL W_READY W_NEW W_WIRE Special Words for Find W_AND W_NOT W_ANDNOT W_OR W_NOTREADY W_SLOW W_ALL Print Command Options W_STORY W_SCRIPT W_RUNDOWN W_DIRECTORY W_ON Words Dictionary site dict words Translation HOLD LOCKED mail READY NEW WIRE and not andnot or slow all story script rundown directory on 227 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries Standard Name Translation W_DAYS SunMonTueWedThuFriSat You can change these translations only once If you make a mistake or want to change them again you must extract the news program from the release CD first Call iNews Cus tomer Support for assistanc
57. directory 64 list date of each backup 67 listing tape backup dates 66 listing tape contents 65 rotating tape dumps 56 rr kb sum SOEKCVTH sc 145 runaway print jobs eliminating 104 rundown queue display 328 setting display lines 328 RXDEBUG 293 RXDEBUGFILE 293 RXSITELISTSZ 293 S scan job list command 168 scanning queues 122 searching by word and date 70 for stories word and day 70 for stories word and month 71 specifying number of stories 71 searching a tape 68 by date 70 searchtape command 68 searchtape console command 155 security groups 39 protecting SYSTEM directory from console 331 security modem 30 security procedures 31 MODIFY DEV field 30 passwords 30 security modem 30 superuser status 30 send console command 155 send del job list command 169 server 291 servers checking communication 110 FTS utility programs 109 service line adding 23 service table adding a network service 23 Index adding a service 24 line format 25 parameters 25 services adding 23 adding dialogs 20 attaching a dialog 25 character mapping 173 defined 19 installing 23 network 23 parts of 23 restricting access 25 setting a purge interval 323 user passwords 31 showtimingbar 284 shutdown console command 156 site files backing up 76 site dict dial 236 site dict shift 240 sitedump command 76 156 siterestore console command 156 softdump command 157 softrestore console command 157 sortfield databas
58. disconnect of a dual AB system The steps may vary when the system is a triple system configuration Triple system configuration customers may need to contact Avid Customer Support for more specific instructions In the example it is assumed that server A was chosen as the survivor and server B was designated the failed server NRCS A survivor NRCS B failed server The failed server is also referred to as the revived server once it is reconnected to the system 85 Chapter 6 Disconnects To export a story to a local hard drive click File drop down menu and select Export Story 86 If you reverse the roles of the servers during your disconnect and make B the survivor and server A the failed server remember to adjust which server you issue the commands on appropriately The steps shown in the following example assume server A is the survivor reverse A and B throughout the process if server B is chosen as your survivor It is assumed for this example that when the servers disconnected server A became a single system system is A master is A and server B also became a single system System is B master is B In this situation users logged in on A can continue working and saving stories Users logged in on B can also continue working and saving stories but since the servers are not mirroring anything saved to server A s database is not copied over to server B s database and vice versa The databases on the mach
59. documents provide more information about some of the other Avid products that integrate with the iNEWS newsroom computer system e 1NEWS ControlAir Installation and Operations Manual e 1NEWS ControlAir User Manual e 1NEWS ControlAir Release Notes e Avid Data Receiver Installlation and Operations Manual e MOS Gateway Installation and Operations Manual e MOS Gateway Release Notes e Media Browse Installation and Operations Manual e Media Browse Training Manual e Media Browse Release Notes For the latest information on all Avid products and documentation on other Unity for News products such as the Avid AirSPACE video server Avid Active ContentManager or the Avid NewsCutter nonlinear editing system see the Avid Knowledge Center http support01 avid com If You Have Documentation Comments We d appreciate any comments or suggestions you may have about this document or any other piece of documentation Please restrict your comments to documentation issues How to Order Documentation Please e mail your documentation comments to TechPubs WI avid com Include the title of the document its part number and the specific section you are commenting on in all correspondence How to Order Documentation To order additional copies of this documentation from within the United States call Avid Sales at 800 949 AVID 800 949 2843 If you are placing an order from outside the United States contact your local Avid represe
60. down at 1 55 pm Please log out Type offline to bring the system offline This will prevent users from logging in At the designated time type list t to see whether anyone is still logged in If there is someone logged in a message similar to the following appears G500 terryl A 199 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries 200 If anyone is logged in type logout all to log them out Type stop all to stop all servers Become a console superuser Typemakeccutab b b for build tables Use makeccutab to build the command and error message tables in the PCU program Information similar to the following appears Translating lt site dict ccucmds gt Translating lt site dict ccuvideo gt Translating lt site dict ccumsgs gt and lt site dict queues gt lt atccu gt unused space is 205 characters lt directccu gt unused space is 205 characters After modifying a dictionary run makeccutab and maketab to have your system read the modified dictionaries and incorporate changes into its programs The makeccutab command builds the command and error message table for the PCU dictionaries and then displays how much space is unused in these dictionaries In the previous example the unused space is 205 characters Typemaketab b to build command and message tables and translate dictionaries for the iNEWS newsroom computer system When the prompt returns run maketab to
61. ed responds to the first Quit command with a question mark to remind the user changes were made to the file and not saved This is a precautionary warning to help prevent a user from exiting ed and inadvertently losing changes that were not saved When the user replies by typing the Quit command a second time ed exits abandoning any changes made 341 Appendix H_ The Line Editor ed 342 Index Symbols site config 23 Numerics 7 bit character set 255 A absolute date defined 303 abstract printing abstract lines database trait 325 account created option 36 adding network services 23 services 23 ASCII tables 255 assigning mailboxes to a queue at console 327 at command 48 at job list command 163 B backing up software 75 backup appending to tape 61 continuation tape 63 data to tape 57 73 75 dbdump command 57 Index listing tape backup dates 66 maximum stories found 71 new tape 61 procedures 56 queues 60 retrieve stories from tape 128 searching a tape 68 by word and date 70 for stories word and day 70 for stories word and month 71 site files to tape 76 sitedump command 76 156 system 156 tape 123 verifying 59 62 bad story fix link counts 133 blocks database organization 43 locked 104 bottom console control command 116 bpoll command 163 broadcast command 120 message 120 broadcast message 120 bscan command 164 building dialogs 20 busy stories 99 C capture dialog command 1
62. feature l 8 Open Registry Editor See To access the Registry Editor on page 274 for more information Navigate to the Environment key and open it Right click on the right side of the Registry Editor window A pop up menu appears Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type DWORD in the Registry Editor Type the name of the new value Sync ToServer Press Enter To set the Value data option gt Right click on the SyncToServer value gt Choose Modify from the pop up menu The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears Edit DWORD Yalue BEI Value name SyncT oServer Value data Base m Hexadecimal Decimal Cancel gt Set the Value data Type 0 zero to disable the synchronized timing feature or 1 to enable it gt Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box Close the Registry Editor window 289 Appendix F Environment Variables Delete_Notify 290 When a deleted queue record was received by the rxnet utility program from a txnet utility program on another news system into an update queue and the queue had a notify group associated with it an alert was sent to the notify group with the queue name and title slug of the deleted entry story This is no different than the notification for new or modified stories entering the queue This resulted in users wasting time searching for deleted stories that were no l
63. finds stories with the word helicopter It would not limit the results to stories that contained both president and helicopter It is not possible to construct Boolean and searches using the searchtape command Searching a Tape by Word and Date Range To restrict a search to stories backed up between certain dates 1 Include the range of dates to which you want to restrict the search in the searchtape command The command format for this kind of search is searchtape from lt date gt to lt date gt for lt words gt Dates must be in YYMMDD year month day or YYYYMMDD format and single digit months and days must begin with a zero for instance April is 04 If you want to specify only a month or year shorten the date format to YYMM or just YY 2 Follow the second date with the word for and the word s for which you want to search To restore stories archived between May 1 2000 and May 21 2000 that contain the word helicopter type searchtape from 000501 to 000521 for helicopter A message similar to the following appears 6 stories restored to SYSTEM SEARCHTAPE The searchtape command looks for stories saved to tape within the dates you specify It does not look for stories created within those dates Searching a Tape by Word and Day To search for stories saved to tape on a particular day use the search format searchtape just lt date gt for lt words gt Restoring Data to the iNEWS Databas
64. lt queue name gt Sends stories over a Tx link to a specified queue on the remote system Applies to tx servers The lt queue name gt parameter is optional When it is not included the story is put into the default destination queue of the user on the remote system quiet nolyes Including quiet no ina job list that performs validation sends a message whenever the server successfully validates a story The default quiet yes means a message is sent only when a story fails validation Applies to action and tx servers 167 Appendix A Command References remote remove replace scan 168 remote lt queue name gt Identifies the secondary wire queue Applies to parallel wire servers remove Deletes stories from the scan queue It must be the last instruction in a job list task Applies to action and tx servers replace lt destination queue name gt lt distribution code gt Works like the dup command except that it updates stories in the destination queue only when they are already present in the destination queue It does not add new stories to the destination queue Applies to action and tx servers scan lt queue name gt priority all everyentry Specifies the queue monitored by this task The scan line must come before any instructions that manipulate stories in the queue like dup or move Ten stories are scanned at a time from each scan queue adding priority to a scan line means all new or modifi
65. must enter months as they are defined in the Words dictionary You can also specify a date range This way you can list users who changed their passwords sometime between two specific dates date1 and date 2 For instance to see if anyone changed their password after August 1 2004 and before August 15 2004 type the following list passchg gt 01AUG2004 lt 15AUG2004 u Information similar to the following appears User DEV Date Created Last Login Last Password loyd 433 02JAN2004 11 50am25AUG2004 9 0lam O5AUG2004 9 05am You can also use List u to check on particular users or groups To do this follow the u in the command with user names or groups you want to check For instance suppose that of all your users only Mitchell and Schofield regularly forget to change their passwords To see if they have not changed their passwords in the last 90 days type the following list passchg lt 90 u mitchell schofield 303 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console Information similar to the following appears User DEV Date Created Last Login Last Password mitchell495 O02JAN2004 10 55am24JUL2004 9 00am O7JAN2004 9 50am This causes list u to report only on Mitchell and Schofield and only if they have not changed their passwords within the specified period of time In the example above Mitchell has not changed his password in the last 90 days but Schofield has If you specify a group such as producers
66. network service you created and its resource you added if any is ready for use Optional Back up site files Console Connect Sessions If you have made significant changes back up your site files with the sitedump console command Console Connect Sessions To connect to the console from an iNEWS Workstation that is once the network remote connect service and its resources are set up do the following 1 Log in to any iNEWS Workstation with a user account allowed to use the Connect to Service feature 2 Select Communicate gt Connect to Service The Connect to Service dialog box will appear offering you a list of services As shown in this example two options are provided to connect to the console each option corresponding to a different iNEWS Server Connect to Service Ea Service Machine Dialog Resource Group Command console console sysops usr bin tlo b console console sysops usr bin tlo 3 Double click on the service you want A dialog box will appear with a dialog as defined in the SYSTEM DIALOG that requests a password 4 Type in the password and press Enter 27 Chapter 2 Connect Services 5 Once connected the dialog box will display the console prompt similar to what appears on the console when you are logged in as a system operator Here is an example of a remote console connection A b ANWS iol x File Edit Terminal Help Password Last login Wed
67. of medium 025 026 lt sub gt substitute 026 027 lt esc gt escape 027 028 lt fs gt file separator 028 029 lt gs gt group separator 029 030 lt rs gt record separator 030 031 lt us gt unit separator 031 032 lt sp gt space 032 033 033 034 a 034 035 035 036 036 037 037 038 amp 038 039 i quote 039 040 040 041 041 042 a 042 043 043 044 P comma 044 045 045 046 period 046 257 Appendix E Character Maps 047 047 048 0 048 049 1 049 050 2 050 051 3 051 052 4 052 053 5 053 054 6 054 055 7 055 056 8 056 057 9 057 058 colon 058 059 lt sc gt 059 060 lt 060 061 061 062 gt 062 063 2 063 064 064 065 A 065 066 B 066 067 C 067 068 D 068 069 E 069 070 F 070 258 ASCII 7 bit Character Set 071 G 071 072 H 072 073 I 073 074 J 074 075 K 075 076 L 076 077 M 077 078 N 078 079 O 079 080 080 081 Q 081 082 R 082 083 S 083 084 T 084 085 U 085 086 V 086 087 WwW 087 088 X 088 089 Y 089 090 Z 090 091 091 092 or lt bks gt 092 093 093 094 a 094 259 Appendix E Character Maps 095 Be underscore 095 096 096 097 a 097 098 b 098 099 c 099 100 d 100 101 e 101 102 f 102 103 g 103 104 h 104 105 i 105 106 j 106 107 k 107 108 1 108 109 m 109 110 n 110 111 o 111 112 p 112 113 q 113 114 r 114 115 s 115 116 t 116 117 u 117 118 v 118 260 IBM Character Set 119 w 119 120 x 120 121 y 121 122 Zz 122 123 123 124 lt nul gt 0 125 125 12
68. old years For instance ARCHIVE 2002 through ARCHIVE 2003 and store them separately It is a good idea to make extra copies of the tapes and store them off site If your computer room is destroyed you can buy new servers But if the computer room is destroyed with all backup tapes stored in the room your data is lost Many corporations use off site storage services for backup tapes Backing up the iNEWS Database Database backups provide insurance against system calamities Also to free up space in the database you can back up stories to a tape and then remove them from the database Avid recommends making frequent backups of important material and the entire database To back up database items to tape use the dbdump console command The dbdump Command The dbdump command backs up the news database including the People files show rundowns wire stories and root database information such as user accounts passwords and directory traits All user database and group traits are stored within the database 57 Chapter 5 Backing Up the iNEWS System The simplest form of the dobdump command is NRCS A dbdump c The c stands for create When you use dbdump c it overwrites any information currently on the tape The dbdump c does a full database backup of everything except the contents of any queue or directory with its skip flag enabled The skip flag is a database trait that prevents the dbdump c command from backing up co
69. on the computer you want to log in to Optional Create a dialog for the service If you want your service to follow certain instructions every time it is invoked create a dialog for the service that contains those instructions See Building a Dialog on page 20 for more information Optional Test your configuration changes on INEWS See the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual for more information on testing the site configuration file Reconfigure the system This causes your system to note changes and incorporate them into appropriate programs Do the following a Select the master computer typically server A b Enter superuser mode c Type NRCS A offline d If you added a new resource or modified an existing one in the process of creating a new service reconfigure your system by typing the following NRCS A configure If you modified an existing service or added a service that uses an existing network resource you did not make any changes to your system s configuration file So you need to have the system note only changes made to the service table by typing the following NRCS A configure s When the prompt returns type NRCS A online Exit superuser mode by holding the Control key Ctrl down and typing the letter D A message similar to the following will appear A Tue Oct 5 00 18 58 2000 msg System being configured When you see the system prompt the
70. on the story and removes it when the user saves the story and gets out of it Edit locks prevent multiple users from making changes to stories Similarly when a user goes into order mode the system puts an order lock on the queue No other user can change the order of stories in the queue until the first user exits order mode 99 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 100 If a user is editing a story and the system crashes or the user s PC locks and needs to be rebooted the edit lock placed on the story remains attached to the story When the system comes back up or after the user logs back in he or she may be unable to edit the story The edit lock will prevent anyone from making changes to the story and users trying to open the story will getastory busy message The story must be unbusied before any user can get back into it This is also true of order lock If a user s PC crashes while he or she is in order mode the order lock remains behind Both edit locks and order locks are removed with the unbusy command The syntax is unbusy lt queuename gt You must know the exact queue name to unbusy it such as SHOW 6 PM RUNDOWN When you unbusy a queue and there is an order lock on it you are first asked whether you want to remove the order lock Then you are asked whether you want to unbusy each busy story in the queue You can respond with yes to remove the edit lock or order lock no to skip that story or quit to exit C
71. qform abstractprinter or ap readgroup or rg abstractstyle or as reindex 131 Appendix A Command References 132 changeform or cform displaylines mailbox or mb notify or ng save sortfield or sf storyform or sform stripform purgeinterval lt days hours gt writegroup or wg Sets and modifies database traits To assign a story form called rundown to the RUNDOWNS 5PM directory type dbtraits rundowns 5pm storyform rundown To assign a queue form called rundown to the RUNDOWNS 5PM directory type dbtraits rundowns 5pm queueform rundown Assigning forms can be combined to one command line such as dbtraits rundowns 5pm storyform rundown queueform rundown dbtraits Command Modes f refresh Forms allowed General Inverted Indexed unorder only Printable Queue operations allowed Read access Queue refresh dbvisit Console Server Commands s Sequential so Sorted t Text timing clocks u Update w Watch appends x Skip dbvisit lt d v i gt r m name s block dbvisit Command Options d Display progress by printing dots i Validate ISAM file record and key sizes m Machine name to disconnect for online use r Read only do not rebuild free list S Operate in slow mode to eliminate cache usage V Verbose output print name of each queue The validation is a validation of ISAM key and record sizes to prevent problems after software upgrades when the key
72. resumes the dialog preventing further user input For instance suppose you have a dialog that logs you into an information service For security reasons you want the dialog to pause at the password prompt let you enter the password and then resume Do this using the pass command followed by a lt cr gt so pressing Enter after entering the password resumes the dialog If you use pass without a parameter it passes everything the user enters until he or she tries to close the connection with the quit command Then the dialog resumes executes the remaining commands in the dialog and closes the connection pause Suspends capturing from within the dialog If you turned capture on earlier in the dialog you can pause capturing using the pause command To resume capturing later in the dialog include a capture command without a destination queue at that point in the dialog stop timer type Dialog Commands stop Stops capturing from within a dialog If you have turned capture on earlier in the dialog you can turn it off using the stop command timer lt of seconds gt lt string to display gt Counts number of seconds specified in lt of seconds gt when it is activated by the next wait command in the dialog When a specified string in the wait command is received timer stops counting and wait resumes the dialog If wait does not receive the expected string within the time specified in the timer command timer d
73. s after the target location For instance 18m20 Line 18 becomes line 20 Lines 19 and 20 become 18 and 19 1 5mg Moves lines through 5 to the end of the file 339 Appendix H_ The Line Editor ed Command Pp s lt old text gt lt new text gt Saving Changes 340 Description amp Examples Continued Contrary to the name the Print command does not send information to a printer Instead it prints text to the console screen It is handy for viewing specific lines within a file Typed alone with no line number references the Print command displays the current line For instance to print to screen lines 10 20 type 10 20p More examples of the Print command can be found in Specifying Lines to Edit on page 334 The Substitute command substitutes a specific portion of a line with new text For instance 3 AvidNews Starter config 09JANO00 s AvidNews iNEWS 1INEWS Starter config O09JANO00 In the above example the user selects line 3 and ed responds by displaying line 3 The user substitutes the word AvidNews for iNEWS but does not alter anything else on the line The line editor ed confirms the substitution by redisplaying line 3 incorporating the change The Copy command copies the line specified and inserts a copy after the target location For instance 5t10 Inserts a copy of line 5 below line 10 The copy becomes line 11 The original line 11 if any becomes line 12 and so f
74. shift ctrl Standard Name K_ALT K_TAB K_ESC K_BACKSPACE K_ENTER K_PAUSE K_REPEAT K_SPACE Printer Messages Dictionary site dict printmsgs Translation alt tab esc backspace enter pause repeat space Printer Messages Dictionary site dict printmsgs The Printer Messages dictionary contains error messages generated by the Sony barcode printer The standard name is in uppercase and must not be changed The translation can be in lowercase uppercase or mixed case Printer Messages Dictionary Standard Name M_TAPEIDREQ M_INVTAPEID M_DUREXCEED M_DURTOOSHORT M_INVTIMECODE M_EOMREQ Translation Tape ID required Invalid tape ID Duration time exceeded Duration time too short Invalid timecode EOM required 239 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries Standard Name M_SOMREQ M_INVCHARS M_EOMSTMISSING M_TAPEIDLEN M_PAGESTRLEN M_SOMEXCEEDS M_UNKERR A_CMDDEL Translation SOM required Tape ID or title has invalid characters EOM Style missing from profile Tape ID must be between 3 8 characters long Page string too long SOM timecode exceeds EOM timecode Unknown print error Case shifting Dictionary site dict shift 240 The Case shifting dictionary maps lowercase characters to their uppercase counterparts and vice versa iINEWS shifts the case of a character according to its decimal value in a standard character conversion table The dictionary
75. stops sorting stories as they enter the queue To indicate that a sorted queue has been ordered the system replaces sorted on the screen with order The dbtrait command o can be used to remove the ordered attribute indicator and make the queue resume sorting from the console There is no o to apply the ordered attribute To find out who last ordered the SHOW 5PM SCRIPTS queue list d o show 5pm scripts Not a database trait indicates a user has locked the queue Only a superuser or someone who knows the correct key for the lock can remove it To find out who last locked the SHOW 5PM SCRIPTS queue list d u show 5pm scripts Name Inverted Sorted Update Location in Display SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT Keyword SRP1o LISUGQSXWFiT i i SRP1lo LISUGQSXWFiT so so SRP1o LISUGQSXWFiT u u Mode Option Database Traits Console Command Summary Definition Example Indicates whether or not stories in a directory or queue will be displayed with the most recent one at the top To display stories in the WIRES ALL queue with the most recent one at the top dbtraits wires all i Indicates whether or not the stories in a queue will be sorted by a form field you choose usually the title field To turn on the sorted trait for the SHOW 5PM SCRIPTS queue dbtraits show 5pm scripts S0 Indicates whether or not stories in a queue will be replaced as new versions are moved or copied to it To indica
76. superuser status only when they need it If any user does not need superuser status remove it Create two user accounts for staff members who need superuser privileges one to be a superuser and another to be a regular user That way you can track activity of superuser accounts Change the superuser password regularly Use a security modem for some of your system s dial up connections A security modem provides an additional layer of password protection Security modems may not work with laptops Contact Avid Customer Support for more information about security modems Ensure that users do not use their names station call letters or other easily guessed words as passwords Require everyone to include at least one non alphabetic character such as a punctuation mark or a number Use the system profile to set a required minimum length for all passwords so no one uses a short password For devices for which you have dedicated resources that is devices that have a one to one correspondence between the physical device and device number used to identify it use device name security on workstations in specific locations and put the device ID in a group If you have dedicated resources you can put a MODIFY DEV field in the queue s story form if you suspect that someone has broken into a user s account When changes are made to stories created after the MODIFY DEV field has been added the system puts the device name of the works
77. that could cause you physical harm Follow the guidelines in this document or on the unit itself when handling electrical equipment This symbol indicates menu commands and subcommands in the order you select them For example File gt Import means to open the File menu and then select the Import command This symbol indicates a single step procedure Multiple arrows in a list indicate that you perform one of the actions listed In the margin you will find tips that help you perform tasks more easily and efficiently Italic font is used to emphasize certain words and to indicate variables Courier Bold font identifies text that you type such as commands entered at the console multiplexor Output displayed on the console screen will appear in regular Courier font Using This Guide Symbol or Convention Meaning or Action Lengthy console displays may be edited to emphasize only the most important information in this manual An ellipsis represents portions of the console display not shown in the text The console can display each server s prompt based on the system ID typically a station s call letters and the server s name Examples in this manual use NRCS as the fictional station and system ID For instance the following is the console prompt for server A on the NRCS system NRCS A Click Quickly click and release the left mouse button Double click Click the left mouse button twice rapidly Right click Qu
78. the database It is used before halting the system To use this command you must first select all servers and log everyone off the system sitedump d lt device gt f lt file gt ehv Makes backups of your system s site files sitedump Command Options d lt device gt is the name of a tape device The actual device name used will be dev lt device gt The default is dev tape f lt file gt is the name of a file to use as the archive e Eject tape when done h Help show usage information v Verbose siterestore d lt device gt f lt file gt ehtv lt file gt All site files will be replaced by the version on the backup tape You will lose the version currently on your system Restores site files and programs backed up to tape with sitedump After performing a siterestore run the grpcheck command to rebuild the mail aliases file siterestore Command Options d lt device gt is the name of a tape device The actual device name used will be dev lt device gt The default is dev tape f lt file gt is the name of a file to use as the archive softdump softrestore A Console Server Commands e Eject tape when done h Help show usage information t Show table of contents no files are restored v Verbose lt file gt Only the named files are restored If a directory is specified all files in the directory will be restored softdump d lt device gt ehv
79. the directory To set the System directory s read group to sysop at the console 1 Log on to the console as a superuser so that the prompt appears like this NRCS A 2 Type NRCS A dbtraits system rg sysop 3 To apply changes you made to stories already in the directory and as a console superuser and type NRCS A gtraits changegroup system A message similar to the following appears SYSTEM CABLES 5 out of 5 changed SYSTEM WIRES 4 out of 4 changed Now only system administrators logged in with an superuser account can see the System directory on their screens You may also have a queue to which you want people to move or duplicate stories but that you do not want anyone to read or go to An example of this would be a confidential suggestions queue to which 331 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console people would move stories containing suggestions Once placed in this queue suggestions would be visible only to those authorized or to superusers For instance to set the read group of the Suggestions queue to mngmt as a console superuser type NRCS A dbtraits suggestions rg mngmt All users you want to allow the capability to send suggestions need to have write access to the queue To make changes take effect on stories already in the Suggestions queue remain a console superuser and type NRCS A gtraits changegroup suggestions Unless you are a member of the mngmt group you can not see th
80. the master database it is now the master computer Since either server can run as master nothing further needs to be done If you wish to make server A the master computer again wait until the diskcopy completes and then perform a normal system shutdown reboot and startup as described in iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual A Wait for the diskcopy to complete before rebooting the system to make server A the master computer again Database corruption may result if the system is taken down before the diskcopy completes If the system loses power or must be rebooted the master computer that contains the full database must be brought up in a single server configuration and the disconnect recovery procedure restarted again Recovery Worksheet The following Disconnect Recovery table lists e Commands involved with recovering from a disconnect e Whether the command is run on the failed server survivor or both servers e Offers a column where you can fill in the name either A or B of the server that fits that role either survivor or failed You may want to photocopy this table and write in names letters of your survivor and failed servers in the boxes for each step 93 Chapter 6 Disconnects Before proceeding The table s procedure shows Method 2 logout all stop all review and understand of splitting the workload to get the devices utility programs and the narrative steps in the previous secti
81. the name AX wire 23 9600 8n anpa7 AX Associated Press You can check WIRES ALL and look at the coding on the stories to determine which port is not flowing and then restart that wire port For the example above stories that come in port 23 will have coding that begins with AX in the writer field Title Writer Created AP IN FWA SevereThunder AXv2in gob 07 06 00 14 54 53 If you notice AX named wires had not come in for a period of time wire port 23 must be restarted and then the Wires queues monitored to see whether the wire is working again Alternatively you can restart the wire port with the minus four 4 option NRCS AS restart 4 23 When restarted in this diagnostic mode a message is printed to the console screen each time a wire story arrives and is placed in a Wires queue Restart it normally once you have confirmed wire flow If it is still not flowing get instruction from your wire service provider on how to reset their equipment Resetting the wire s modem should trigger a wire reset message which should arrive in either the WIRES ALL or WIRES UNKNOWN queue If the reset message reaches the database it is an indication the wire port is working and wire stories should then start to flow If you do not get wire flow try stopping resetting power cycling and then restarting the entire PCU System Printer Problems You can also do a wire dump which redirects any characters coming in the PCU port and
82. the queue If not specified the first story in the queue is used order yes no Indicates that order changes in the scan queue should be transmitted to the remote system For this to work correctly the destination queue on the remote system must have its update trait turned on poll publish put quiet Job List Commands The order command applies to tx servers and action servers For action servers the order of the scan queue is propogated to each of the dup move and replace command destination queues Specifying order without yes or no is the same as order yes poll lt queue name gt lt polling interval gt lt polling durations Reads stories in the specified primary queue in a forward direction at certain intervals for a specified duration Polling is used in conjunction with the put or dup commands for rundown mirroring Stories with modified times greater than the time of the last scan are processed If an interval and duration are not specified a single scan of the primary queue will be done Applies to timed interval action and tx servers See Chapter 13 of the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual for more information publish no yes When placed following a scan or bscan line the txnet publishing option publish no disables appending information to the PUBLISHED HTML file on the remote system when using HTML export The default is set to yes Applies to tx servers put
83. translate site dictionaries To make it build the table add b to this command A display similar to the following appears Translating lt site dict queues gt Translating lt site dict words gt Translating lt site dict messages gt lt host gt unused space is 109 characters Translating lt site dict doac gt lt snews gt unused space is 221 characters Translating lt site dict doac gt lt nxserver gt unused space is 221 characters The maketab command translates each dictionary and then displays unused space in these dictionaries Customizing Dictionaries If you changed the name of a command in a command dictionary you must also change the function key definition that references that command 10 Restart all devices 11 At the prompt exit from superuser using Ctrl D 12 Reset your system s PCUs using their reset switches 13 When all PCUs have completed their reset restart them by typing restart all at the console Once you have restarted the system try using enter directory and enter queue The system no longer recognizes these commands It recognizes the make directory andmake queue commands 14 Back up your site files with the sitedump command If you do not have one of your site files a message similar to the fol lowing appears when you run the makeccutab or maketab console command Translating lt site dict ccucmds gt Cannot access translation file lt site dict ccucmds gt
84. upgrades The following table lists names and locations of dictionary files Names and Locations of Dictionary Files File Name amp Location Dictionary File Name site dict ccucmds Terminal commands site doct ccumsgs Error and Status Messages site dict ccuvideo Video Modes site dict messages Utility Messages site dict queues Required Queues site dict words Status and Option Words site dict doac Connect Commands and Messages site dict telex Telex Commands and Messages site dict dial Modem Dial Messages Using Dictionaries to Define Messages and Commands Names and Locations of Dictionary Files File Name amp Location Dictionary File Name site dict keymacros Key Names for Macros site dict printmsgs Printer Messages site dict shift Case Shifting Parameters site dict mcs MCS Alarms and Words site dict mctcmds MCT Commands site dict mctmsgs MCT Error and Status Messages Each line in a dictionary begins with a standard name followed by the translation for the command message or word represented by that standard name as shown in the following Dictionary Standard Names and Translation table Dictionary Standard Names and Translation Standard Name Translation cursor left cu 1 cursor top cu t cursor up cu u Each translation is preceded by a slash In commands the translation represents the minimum a user must enter to execute the command In the example above the translation cu u is the minimum a user must e
85. users system administrators will usually use them in dialogs to set up the translations for users rather than leave it for users to do after they have connected capture lt destination queue name gt Places a copy of all text received from the remote connection during a session in a story into the queue you specify Usually you invoke capture from the cmd gt prompt However to turn capture on in a dialog place the capture command and destination queue name at the point in the dialog where you want to begin capturing material You must include a destination queue unless you are restarting capture after having paused it If you have not paused capture earlier in the dialog leaving out the queue name generates an error and terminates the dialog delay lt of seconds gt Pauses the dialog for a number of seconds When the specified time has passed the dialog resumes Put the command where you want the dialog to pause and follow it with the number of seconds you want the dialog to pause For instance to pause the dialog for five seconds type delay 5 Although the dialog is suspended while this command is in effect you can use the quit connect command to close the connection diag echo escape Dialog Commands diag on off Normally a dialog s diagnostic mode is off and screen output is suppressed while the dialog is running However you can use the diag command to turn the dialog s diagnostic mode on so yo
86. window See RGB Hexadecimal Color Chart on page 283 for more information on possible colors used in this environment variable 277 Appendix F Environment Variables DestinationOrder Enabling the destination order feature ensures the user s Home location is always the top item in the Destination queue list For instance when you duplicate a story to another queue the user s Home location will always be the top item in the list It also ensures the user s Destination location is the second item in the list To enable the destination order feature do the following 1 Open Registry Editor See To access the Registry Editor on page 274 for more information 2 Navigate to the Environment key and open it 3 Right click on the right side of the Registry Editor window A pop up menu appears 4 Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type DWORD in the Registry Editor 5 Type the name of the new value DestinationOrder 6 Press Enter 7 To set the Value data option gt Right click on the DestinationOrder value gt Choose Modify from the pop up menu The Edit DWORD Value dialog appears Edit DWORD Value Value name DestinationOrder Value data aooo C Decimal Cancel 278 MailLookup Environment Variables Registry Values gt Set the Value data Type 0 zero to disable the destination order feature or 1 to enable it A
87. 0 i Do not index Do not post index request to SYSTEM INDEX when a story is restored in an indexed queue k lt keyword gt You can specify multiple keywords m lt value gt Maximum number of stories to restore M Preserve modification times n lt directory gt lt new name gt N Read from network socket for dump data p lt queue gt Only with key letter s will create queue s lt platform gt Linux You cannot use both the s and d options in the same command Select one or the other not both Additionally you must be a superuser to list ISAM files dbserver lt high water gt Reclaims space from the Dead queue and places it on the free list Use dbserver to build up the free list prior to periods of peak use When you use dbserver specify the total number of free blocks you want to have in the free list If the free list contains 25 000 blocks and you want to build up the free list to 100 000 blocks type dbserver 100000 When the free list contains the desired number of blocks dbserver stops If you specify a number that is smaller than the current free list size dbserver will not do anything You can also use dbserver to place all space in the Dead queue on the free list To do so specify that you want to rebuild the free list to an unreasonably large size dbsort dbtraits Console Server Commands For instance on a maximum 16 gigabyte database type dbserver 16000000 The dbserver comman
88. 290 monitor 290 Training RXNET TXNET DEVICES 181 Appendix B System Files 182 special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special special r 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 O O O O O O OnO Ome oO e E o E E E e E e A A e On On T E o E On On Oe On On e O e e txnet txnet txnet txnet txnet txnet txnet txnet txnet txnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet rxnet WEB ACCESS SESSIONS websession 401 402 INWS SESSIONS i inws inws END OF FILE 501 504 601 604 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 0 gnews 0 gnews 7 txne txne txne txne txne txne txne txne txne txne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne rxne inws inws site printers hplaser1 HP LaserJet IVsi Printer profile Isite system ejectcode lt ff gt ejectcount 1 idlecount 0 pagelength 66 scriptrhstart 32 scriptrhmax 23 scriptlhmax 25 scriptshift yes scripttemplate no
89. 42 unbusying 100 defining messages and commands using dictionaries 196 delay dialog command 170 delete_notify 290 deleting runaway print jobs 104 destinationorder 278 devices character mapping 173 diag dialog command 171 dial command 134 dialog commands capture 170 delay 170 diag 171 echo 171 escape 171 expect 172 heol 172 introduction 169 list 169 map 173 mapin 173 mapout 173 message 174 pass 174 pause 174 346 stop 175 timer 175 type 175 wait 176 dialog for service 25 dialogs 20 22 building 20 capture command 20 creating a queue 20 dictionaries case shifting 240 ccumsgs 213 connect dictionary 230 defining messages and commands 196 dial dictionary 236 editing 198 incorporating changes 200 keyboard macros 237 mcs dictionary 242 printer messages dictionary 239 queues dictionary 223 restoring standard translations 201 space limitations 197 standard names 197 table space exceeded 201 telex dictionary 234 words dictionary 226 dictionary defaults restoring 201 disaster recovery 73 75 disconnect causes of 83 detecting 81 exporting stories 81 overview 80 recovery 84 types of 82 disk space distribution and purging 42 diskclear command 135 diskcopy 136 caution 93 disks in use list 123 display line rundown queue 328 setting 327 distribution job list command 164 doc 49 136 down keyword console control command 116 down number console control command 116
90. 6 126 127 lt del gt Delete 127 IBM Character Set The IBM character set is the same as the ASCII 7 bit character set for the first 127 characters For the remaining characters see the following IBM Character table IBM Character 128 80 190 C7 129 81 252 FC 130 82 233 E9 131 83 226 E2 132 84 228 E4 133 85 224 EO 134 86 a 229 E5 261 Appendix E Character Maps 262 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D my gt gt h ci Cc O x c A 231 234 235 232 239 238 236 196 197 201 230 198 244 246 242 251 249 253 214 220 162 163 165 E7 EA EB E8 EF EE EC C4 C5 C9 E6 C6 F4 F6 F2 FB F9 FD D6 DC A2 A3 A5 IBM Character Set 158 9E lt nul gt 0 0 159 OF lt nul gt 0 0 160 AO a 225 E1 161 A1 237 ED 162 A2 6 243 F3 163 A3 a 250 FA 164 A4 fi 241 Fl 165 A5 209 D1 166 A6 a 170 AA 167 A7 s 186 BA 168 A8 lt nul gt 0 0 169 A9 lt nul gt 0 0 170 AA lt nul gt 0 0 171 AB lt nul gt 0 0 172 AC lt nul gt 0 0 173 AD lt nul gt 0 0 174 AE lt nul gt 0 0 175 AF lt nul gt 0 0 176 BO lt nul gt 0 0 177
91. 7 gt map lt 15 gt lt 205 gt map lt 16 gt lt 230 gt 269 Appendix E Character Maps map lt 17 gt lt 212 gt map lt 18 gt lt 204 gt map lt 19 gt lt 225 gt lt 199 gt map lt 20 gt lt 218 gt map lt 21 gt lt 209 gt map lt 22 gt lt 195 gt map lt 23 gt lt 225 gt map lt 24 gt lt 202 gt map lt 25 gt lt 199 gt map lt 26 gt lt 218 gt 727 is figure shift map lt 28 gt lt 227 gt map lt 29 gt lt 211 gt map lt 30 gt lt 199 gt lt 225 gt 731 is letter shift map lt 32 gt _ lt bs gt map lt 33 gt lt 55 gt map lt 34 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt 34 is new line map lt 35 gt lt 213 gt 736 is space map lt 37 gt lt 236 gt map lt 38 gt lt 50 gt map lt 39 gt lt 51 gt map lt 40 gt lt 223 gt map lt 41 gt lt 222 gt map lt 42 gt lt 54 gt map lt 43 gt lt 229 gt map lt 44 gt lt 228 gt map lt 45 gt lt 201 gt map lt 46 gt lt 236 gt map lt 47 gt lt 205 gt map lt 48 gt lt 53 gt map lt 49 gt lt 212 gt map lt 50 gt lt 204 gt map lt 51 gt lt 56 gt map lt 52 gt lt 47 gt map lt 53 gt lt 52 gt map lt 54 gt lt 48 gt map lt 55 gt lt 57 gt 270 map lt 56 gt map lt 57 gt map lt 58 gt 759 is figure shift map lt 60 gt map lt 61 gt map lt 62 gt 63 is letter shift lt 49 gt lt 193 gt lt 218 gt lt 227 gt lt 211 gt lt 225 gt Sample Arabic Wire Profile 271 Appendix
92. 70 343 Index caution database corruption 83 diskcopy 93 servers disconnect 81 cccolor 276 ccucmds 196 ccureset console command 152 changing user passwords 31 character mapping dbrestore 63 devices 173 service 173 checking for a locked block 105 cleaning the database monthly 50 53 offline 50 53 commands at 48 Avid personnel only 114 capture connect 20 date 49 dblines 48 dbserver 43 dialog 169 doc 49 136 editing 337 grep 49 hogs 45 communication testing 152 computer commands 116 configuration file checking for errors 120 incorporating changes 120 configure command 120 connect changing escape character 171 installing a service 23 mapping characters 173 connect command 121 344 waiting for 21 connecting a service 23 connecting devices network resources 23 connectivity testing with ping 107 console managing groups 329 PRINTER display 117 printing history 117 console command broadcast 120 ccureset 152 configure 120 connect 121 153 dbclean 122 dbclose 122 dbdev 123 dbdump 123 dbfree 124 dblines 126 dboriginal 126 dbpurge 127 dbrestore 128 dbserver 130 dbsort 131 dbvisit 133 dial 134 diskclear 135 diskcopy 136 doc 136 edit 136 force 33 35 137 298 grpcheck 137 gtraits 137 help 138 hogs 138 idiff 139 list a 146 list B 142 list c 142 list d 142 list g 143 list s 144 list u 144 304 logout 146 makeccutab 147 maketab 14
93. 7e5274 02608c7e6b58 02608c7e532e 0020aff42efc 0020aff42dad 0020aff42dcb 0020aff432ca 0020aff42d42 0020aff431bf 0020aff43277 ries ns001 ns002 ns003 ns004 87 thibault 22 04 lucas 57 ns009 ns010 ns011 ns012 ns013 ns014 ns015 ns016 ns017 ns018 ns019 ns020 ns021 ns022 big table brock 07 nydam 16 lockett 38 christensen 48 betty 69 aveson 28 robinson 49 tinsley 63 reed 44 landis 61 dorr 51 donnallen 60 douda 54 kennedy 52 control room becker 30 glass 29 SYSTEM CONFIGURE 301 ACTION SYSTEM CONFIGURE 301 ACTION scan scan scan scan scan scan scan scan scan scan scan system remove system dup system dup system dup system phones dup phones phones dup phones phones dup phones phones dup phones phones dup phones phones dup phones phones dup phones phones dup phones phones dup phones misc shredder cables master cables groups cables cable cables device_type airports all business all fire all government federal all government local all government state all hospitals all media all all 187 Appendix B System Files SYSTEM MAP 188 lt rundown queue gt lt event dir gt lt composite gt lt grp gt lt mon off time gt lt name gt lt dev name gt lt update gt lt mct temp gt lt drv gt lt dir gt lt range gt show 6am rundown show
94. 8 14998 SEEK 238 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S240 14999 SEEK 240 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S236 14997 SEEK 236 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S232 14995 SEEK 232 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S234 14996 SEEK 234 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S254 15001 ACTION 254 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S504 15026 monitor 504 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrces a S506 15027 monitor 506 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S508 15028 monitor 508 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S510 15029 monitor 510 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S238 14998 SEEK 238 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S240 14999 SEEK 240 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S236 14997 SEEK 236 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S232 14995 SEEK 232 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S234 14996 SEEK 234 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S254 15001 ACTION 254 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S258 15003 ACTION 258 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S252 15000 ACTION 252 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a S256 15002 ACTION 256 0 Server Hot to go Jul 13 07 46 25 nrcs a disconnect B COMPUTER DISCONNECTED In addition to console warning messages a warning message is broadcast to all users currently logged in to the system This warning appears on the
95. 9 msgclean 150 offline 150 online 150 otod 151 print 152 reconnect 153 rename 154 restart 154 searchtape 155 send 155 shutdown 156 sitedump 156 siterestore 156 softdump 157 softrestore 157 startup 158 stop 159 su 159 utraits 160 version 161 wholockedit 162 wiredump 162 copying stories 44 D DAT tapes 56 database blocks 43 checking for errors 48 cleaning monthly 50 53 cleaning offline 50 53 cleanup 50 Index error check 133 export stories if disconnect occurs 81 free up space 323 purge interval 42 purging cycle 42 retrieve stories from tape 128 size 124 understanding storage 43 database cycle 42 database maintenance 48 dbvisit 133 regular repair 133 database storage create space by purging 323 increasing 46 maintaining 48 53 tracking 44 units 43 database traits abstract lines 325 display lines 327 display lines for rundown queue 328 purge interval 323 skip flag 58 sortfield 321 date command 49 datel and date2 302 dbclean console command 122 dbclose console command 122 dbdev console command 123 dbdump command 57 61 dbfree 72 124 space usage 46 dblines 126 explained 48 using log file 48 dboriginal 126 dbpurge 42 127 dbrestore 64 128 character mapping 63 345 Index tdv command 59 dbserver 43 space usage 46 syntax 130 dbsort 131 dbvisit 133 checking the database 52 cleaning database 50 Dead queue 42 introduction 42 reclaim space 130 reclaiming 46 retrieving a story
96. ATION Que 3 TEST SMITH 3630 stories listed The first column of the listing identifies whether the item is a queue or a directory If it is a queue the second column indicates how many stories are in that queue The third column displays the name of the directory or queue If any queues in the list do not have stories listed then either the queue has no stories or the queue has its skip flag enabled If the skip flag is enabled the queue name is copied to tape but none of its stories are copied In the previous example the Dead queue does not have any stories on the tape When the list is complete remove the tape Set the tape s write protect switch to the on position and write the date on the case label Backing up Individual Queues 60 Individual queues can be backed up by specifying the n flag and listing up to 10 queue or directory names NRCS A dbdump c n lt queue or directory name gt To back up individual queues or directories to tape 1 Insert tape into a server s drive and select that server 2 Use the dbdump command in one of the following formats gt Backing up the iNEWS Database If you do not have a tape that already contains a backup insert a new tape and back up the queue For instance to back up SCRIPTS 2004 FEB on a new tape type dbdump c n scripts 2000 feb A verification request appears Do you really want to create a new archive n y If there is
97. Avid iINEWS Newsroom Computer System Operations and Troubleshooting Manual Version 2 0 Avid make manage move media VI o Copyright and Disclaimer Product specifications are subject to change without notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Avid Technology Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement You can obtain a copy of that license by visiting Avid s Web site at www avid com The terms of that license are also available in the product in the same directory as the software The software may not be reverse assembled and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the license agreement It is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the license agreement Avid products or portions thereof are protected by one or more of the following United States patents 4 746 994 4 970 663 5 045 940 5 267 351 5 309 528 5 355 450 5 396 594 5 440 348 5 452 378 5 467 288 5 513 375 5 528 310 5 557 423 5 568 275 5 577 190 5 584 006 5 640 601 5 644 364 5 654 737 5 715 018 5 724 605 5 726 717 5 729 673 5 745 637 5 752 029 5 754 851 5 781 188 5 799 150 5 812 216 5 852 435 5 905 841 5 929 836 5 929 942 5 930 445 5 930 797 5 946 445 5 987 501 5 999 190 6 016 152 6 018 337 6 023 531 6 023 703 6 031 529 6 058 236 6 061 758 6 091 778 6 105 083 6 118 444 6 128 001 6 134 607 6 137 919 6 141 691 6
98. Color White FFFFFF Yellow FFFF00 ShowTimingBar A system administrator can define which key on the keyboard is used to advance the timing bar during show timing The default key is the space bar To change the setting to a different key 1 Open Registry Editor See To access the Registry Editor on page 274 for more information 2 Navigate to the Environment key and open it 3 Right click on the right side of the Registry Editor window A pop up menu appears 4 Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type DWORD in the Registry Editor 5 Type the name of the new value ShowTimingBar 6 Press Enter 7 To set the Value data option gt Right click on the ShowTimingBar value 284 Environment Variables Registry Values gt Choose Modify from the pop up menu The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears Edit DWORD Value Value name ShowTimingBar Value data Base Hexadecimal Decimal Cancel The ShowTimingBar Value data is determined by the Scan Code of the selected key on the keyboard For instance if the system administrator wants to use the F12 key to advance the timing bar the Value data for the ShowTimingBar registry would be either the Hexadecimal code of 58 or Decimal code of 88 See the following Scan Codes table for more information Scan Codes Key accent tilde 1 exclamation point 2 at
99. EPFIELDLIST lt filename gt RXSEPFIELDLIST defines a file name That file is processed as a list of field substitutions For instance RXSEPFIELDLIST site env substitutes in the site env nxserver file rxnet inherits this variable when invoked The format of each line of the field substitution file is lt field identifier gt lt field name gt where lt field identifier gt isa single character SEP field identifier and lt field name gt isa valid nsm1 field name An example would be 1 video id This causes the contents of the APP1 field identified by 1 to be put into the nsm1 field video id instead of the usual APP1 1 RXSITEIDLE lt seconds gt The idle time value may be set from the client via SITE IDLE lt seconds gt where lt seconds gt is a count of seconds For instance SITE IDLE 900 sets the idle timeout to 15 minutes SITE IDLE 0 disables the timeout 293 Appendix F Environment Variables 294 The client can query the rxnet server to find out what the current idle timeout is with SITE IDLE You can also define an idle timeout value to override the localtimeout setting by inserting RXSITEIDLE lt seconds gt in the file site env nxserver You can also define an idle timeout value to override the localtimeout setting by inserting RXSITEIDLE lt seconds gt in the file site env nxserver RXOLDNLST 1 FTP clients that use the MGETcommand make an NLST request to get the list of story file names for r
100. EWS System Searching a Tape 68 A message similar to the following appears Listing tape contents only Starting Dump 1 Block 0 Dumped Tue Jul10 15 33 01 2004 Continuing with Dump 2 Block 0 Dumped Thu Jul15 10 30 19 2004 Elapsed time 00 13 In the example the tape contains two backups one done on July 10 2004 and another done on July 15 2004 You can retrieve individual stories from a tape by searching for a word contained in the story The searchtape Command The searchtape command allows you to search through a tape looking for a specific word Stories that contain that word are restored to the SYSTEM SEARCHTAPE queue There is a maximum number of stories or hits that will be restored with the searchtape command This default is specified in the site system file See Searching a Tape by Word s on page 69 for more information When you list a tape s contents your system must read all information on the tape to generate a list of the contents If the tape contains much information listing the tape s contents takes a significant amount of time Because searching tapes for stories takes a long time and can reduce system performance restrict tape searches to periods of lighter system use Avid recommends running all tape operations during non critical periods not during shows Restoring Data to the INEWS Database Searching a Tape for Stories To search a tape for stories 1 Combine on
101. Error Messages Shared by Monitor Servers and Drivers A_XMAX Exceeded max events A_NOMEM Out of memory Driver Errors Sent to MCT Only A_NOHOST Disconnected from host Driver Errors Sent to MCT and Possibly to Console amp Mon User A_NODEV Device error A_NODEVCOMM Device communication failed MCS Dictionary site dict mcs Driver Errors Sent to User Only A_LOADDONE A_LOADERR A_DRIVEREXIT A_CANOTCUED Download complete Errors in download Driver exiting Tape not cued Status Reported in Device Status Field A_EVERR ERROR A_CAFRZ FREEZE A_CATREL TREL A_CATHRD THREAD A_CACUING CUEING A_CACUED CUED A_CANOTAPE N L A_CABIN BIN A_CAPLAY PLAY A_CAPAUSE PAUSED A_CAREW REWIND A_CAEJECT EJECT A_CAINCMPLT TRANSFER 247 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries 248 Appendix D PCU Reference This appendix contains the following main sections e Overview PCUs Appendix D PCU Reference Overview PCUs 250 A Peripheral Controller Unit PCU is a Personal Computer PC connected between an iNEWS Server and one or more serial devices such as printers and wire services The PCU expands the available serial ports and relieves the server of routine communication with the devices The PCU is an open system The operating system is Microsoft DOS and a standard public domain TCP IP network stack is used No server should be connected to more than half the number of PCUs i
102. Files fete dhepd conts sesuur eee oe aE ee Ae oe ee 178 letcMhosts nfo cece beer Se ee ba eee oe ee 178 ISKG CONTIG ieee eek ae tha ok ee Pee a eee wane gen 179 site printers nplaser1 2 0000 0c eee ee 183 ISIG SYSIOM rnistri HES ee ew Aha ota wae be ea as 183 Isite wires anpa7 0000 00 cee eee 184 console Cig iii doen ee eae tedden saree eg ieee 185 SYSTEM CLIENT WINDOWS 00000 002 eeeeaee 186 SYSTEM CONFIGURE 301 ACTION 2202200 000 187 SYSTEMLMAP ca truo bei ce PvE ey EY RR ne PA Ee ee 188 vi Appendix C SYSTEM RESOURCE mopoho apaatia Corale ia KAEA a kea RA 190 SYSTEM WIRES DISTRIBUTION 0 0 00 192 SYSTEM WIRES KEYWORDS 00 00 0000000000 193 SYSTEM WIRES KEYWORDS AP 0 0 00 000000 193 SYSTEM WIRES KEYWORDS AP2 0 0000000005 194 Standard Dictionaries Using Dictionaries to Define Messages and Commands 196 Names and Locations of Dictionary Files 196 Customizing Dictionaries 0 000 ec ee 198 Changing Default Dictionary Values 0 000005 198 Restoring Dictionary Defaults 00 0002 e ee eee 201 Utility Messages Dictionary site dict messages 203 DBServer Program MessageS 000 0c eee eee 204 Disconnect Program MessagesS 000e eee eee 205 Category and Keyword Check Program Messages 205 Keyboard Check Program Mess
103. HHHHH wires all ALWAYS URGENT NCHHHHHHUH wires advisory priority NCHHHHHHHH wires all NCHHHHHHHH wires newschannel NCHHHHHHHH wires all ALWAYS URGENT APHH HH HHHGH sports wires APHH HH HHHSH sports wires 192 SYSTEM WIRES KEYWORDS SYSTEM WIRES KEYWORDS AP system wires keywords ap wires keywords system wires keywords ap2 wires UP system wires keywords others wires keywords SYSTEM WIRES KEYWORDS AP destination atlanta atlanta destination rape rape destination braves braves destination carter carter destination tuscaloosa tuscaloosa and football destination xgr xgr destination medsource medc2 or medstar destination gingrich gingrich destination space space AND shuttle OR shuttle AND columbia or shuttle AND atlantis shuttle AND discovery destination drugs crack AND cocaine destination air safety crash and plane OR ntsc or n t s c or faa or f a a destination delta delta and airlines OR hartsfield and airport destination guns guns or weapons or nra 193 Appendix B System Files SYSTEM WIRES KEYWORDS AP2 destination 9am specials 900a and specials 194 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries This appendix defines and explains contents of standard dictionaries as they are installed on your iINEWS newsroom computer system Reference this information when modifying dictionary contents Major sections are Using Dictionaries to Define Messages and Commands Cu
104. I 7 bit Character Set e IBM Character Set e dbrestore Character Map Arabic e Sample Arabic Wire Profile ASCII 7 bit Character Set The following ASCII 7 bit table is an identity mapping where the wire value equals the mapped value with one exception the wire value of 124 is mapped to 0 The other 127 values are preserved Appendix E Character Maps 256 ASCII 7 bit Value 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 Mapped Alias Description lt nul gt lt soh gt lt stx gt lt etx gt lt eot gt lt enq gt lt ack gt lt bel gt lt bs gt lt ht gt lt lf gt lt vt gt lt ff gt lt cr gt lt so gt lt si gt lt dle gt lt dcl gt lt dc2 gt lt dc3 gt lt dc4 gt lt nak gt lt syn gt null start of header start of text end of text end of transmission enquiry acknowledgment bell back space horizontal tab line feed vertical tab form feed carriage return shift out shift in data link escape device control 1 device control 2 device control 3 device control 4 negative acknowledge synchronous idle Mapped Value 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 ASCII 7 bit Character Set Value Mapped Alias Description Mapped Value 023 lt etb gt end of transmission 023 024 lt can gt cancel 024 025 lt em gt end
105. IED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE The following disclaimer is required by the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are based on work of the Independent JPEG Group The following disclaimer is required by Paradigm Matrix Portions of this software licensed from Paradigm Matrix The following disclaimer is required by Ray Sauers Associates Inc Install It is licensed from Ray Sauers Associates Inc End User is prohibited from taking any action to derive a source code equivalent of Install lt including by reverse assembly or reverse compilation Ray Sauers Associates Inc shall in no event be liable for any damages resulting from reseller s failure to perform reseller s obligation or any damages arising from use or operation of reseller s products or the software or any other damages including but not limited to incidental direct indirect special or consequential Damages including lost profits or damages resulting from loss of use or inability to use reseller
106. If stories are not being sent to iINEWS that is the number of stories processed never increments in the Administation application ensure raw data logging is enable and functioning If it s not check your hardware connection and the Data Receiver configuration If some raw data is being logged but stories are still not being sent to iNEWS then check the start stop sequence configuration for Serial and Telnet input types Also ensure file logging is set to ALL and check the log file for parsing errors This would indicate a possible problem with parsing NSML which could make iNEWS reject stories when Data Receiver attempts to send them Wire ports are either on or off They either receive data and stories or they do not The wire port cannot decide to let some stories in but not other stories If stories are coming in to your AP wire port but it is missing 101 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 102 some weather stories for instance this is most likely a problem with what AP equipment is feeding because the PCU port is not selective about which stories it decides to keep and which to ignore If a wire stops flowing into the system entirely the first step is to figure out which wire port is not working On its line in the site config file each wire port is assigned a name such as AP RT or NC This name is in the fifth column of the wire s configuration line For instance the following configuration file entry shows a wire port with
107. If this happens use dbdump c instead 3 When the console prompt returns the backup is done Remove the tape and set the write protect switch on Date the tape case label 4 To verify the backup type dbrestore tdv This list should be short but it could take time to complete if the tape contains several weeks worth of backups Notes on Backing up the Database 62 If you try to back up data to a write protected tape on the Linux platform you get a message similar to the following NRCS A dbdump c Do you really want to create a new archive y n y Starting Dump 1 Block 0 dumped on Thur Jul15 0 36 14 2004 dumping isam user Please remove tape Insert continuation tape make sure safety is off When continuation tape is ready type y RETURN If the tape is write protected remove it from the drive On some tape drives you can change the write protect without removing the tape Set the write protect switch to off insert the tape and repeat dbdump Daily backups usually take very little time and generally do not affect system performance However backing up a large amount of material to tape may hinder system performance so you should only do it during times of lighter system use Restoring Data to the INEWS Database If you have a very large database the full database backup may require two or more tapes The system prompts you to insert the next tape Remove the current tape number it as
108. It can also be used to compare the contents of indexes and indexed queues adjust the indexes and is a vital tool for FTS troubleshooting and operation The format for the command is ftsdebug index search lt parameter gt The index option will apply the t sdebug command to the utility program used by FTS known as the ftsindex server or ft sidx exe The search option will apply the t sdebug command to the utility program known as the ftsseek server or ft ssch exe Parameter Description closelog Close the log file leaves log intact debug Set debug log level for the program to Level 0 no logging done Level 1 each action logged Level 2 request parameters logged Level 3 request parameters and log each action openlog Open reopen the log truncates existing log shutdown Shutdown the program on the FTS server There is no start parameter because the FTS programs must be started from the FTS server 109 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Parameter statistics viewlog Limited to index only showrequests tune on off tune lt type gt Limited to search only adjust v lt path gt compare v lt path gt list n lt path gt Description Show program version start time and statistics Print the contents of the log file List pending index requests SYSTEM INDEX Turn tuning on or off or force a major tune Types of tunes are minor major and absolute which tunes immediately
109. Jul 13 44 17 from nrcs b NRCS Bt E Capturing session to SYSTEM CAPTUI H 6 You can now perform various administrative tasks through the console connect session as opposed to doing them while physically located at the console A To stop a console connect session press Ctrl D Do not close the dialog box by selecting the Close option from the File drop down menu or by clicking on the X button in the upper right corner Serial Connect Services Although less commonly used since the advent of the Internet serial connect services can also be configured to connect and log in to other computers either via modem dialup or direct serial line Contact Avid Customer Support if you need to configure a serial connection for your users 28 Chapter 3 Database Security This chapter describes how to use various features in the iNEWS newsroom computer system to establish and maintain database security This chapter contains the following main sections Establishing Security Procedures e User Passwords e Checking Password Status e Tracking User Activity e Using Group Security to Control System Access Chapter 3 Database Security Establishing Security Procedures 30 Use the following guidelines to improve the security of your system Set up official security procedures and have everyone in the newsroom follow them Keep track of your backup tapes You can get user passwords from a backup tape Assign users
110. Key Decimal Hexadecimal Up Arrow 72 48 Down Arrow 80 50 Right Arrow 77 4D Left Arrow 75 4B NUM Number Lock key 69 45 divide on Numeric Keypad 53 35 minus on Numeric Keypad 74 4A plus on Numeric Keypad 78 4E Print Screen 55 37 The timing feature of INEWS syncronizes the clock on the local workstation with the time set on the server when a user activates show timing A user can use the Set Clock option from the Tools drop down menu to manually override the clock synchronization This feature is turned off by default but a system administrator can turn it on at any workstation by creating a new registry value in the workstation The syncronized timing feature should be enabled only at those workstations used to time a show If the SyncToServer registry value is not created and defined at a workstation then the synchronized timing feature is disabled at that workstation This feature is not backwards compatible to iNEWS newsroom computer system software prior to version 1 2 4 Before enabling the synchronized timing feature by creating the SyncToServer Registry value in any workstation the software for both iNEWS Workstation s and iNEWS Server s must be upgraded iNEWS newsroom computer system will issue the following message if the server does not support the sync to server feature Timing synchronization failed Not supported on this server Environment Variables Registry Values To enable the syncronized timing
111. Modifying User Traits from the Console A message similar to the following appears Users who will be forced to make password changes on next login mitchell schofield 2 users qualified out of a domain of 2 users and were updated The force command tells you who is going to be required to change their passwords The example above reports that it will make both Mitchell and Schofield change their passwords If you find that a user does not have a password use the force command to require the user to select a password the next time he or she logs in The following example uses the force console command to make Weisman select a new password at the next login To do this type the NRCS A force weisman A screen similar to the following appears Users who will be forced to make password changes on next login weisman 1 users qualified out of a domain of 1 users and were updated You can use the force console command to require that anyone who has not changed passwords since a certain date or within a certain date range do so You can also use this command to force a particular group of users or all your users to change their passwords To do this use the force console command with the following format force q passchg lt date or date range gt lt user or group names gt Normally the force command tells you which users must change their passwords the next time they log in If you would rather not se
112. ORMS Q FTS Q_GROUPS Q_ HELP Q_ HOME Translation system account system teleprinter addrlist system teleprinter distribution system wires distribution system client dos system client com system client remote search system client com versions system client rs versions system client wire server system client windows system client versions system configure dead notes wires advisory priority system forms system fts system groups system help terminal notes Standard Name Q_INDEX Q KEYBOARDS Q KEYWORDS Q MAIL Q _MAILOUT Q_MAILERROR Q MESSAGE Q_MOS_MAP Q Q MRESOURCE Q_NODEST Q_PRINTERS Q_PRINTER2 Q _REMOTE_SEARCH Q_SEARCHTAPE Q_SEEK Q STYLES Q SERVICE Q_SCRIPT Q_SPELL Q TEMPLATES Q_ TITLE __ENTRY Queues Dictionary site dict queues Translation system index system keyboards system wires keywords mail system mail out system mail error system message system mos map system map system resource system unknown system printers system printers2 system remote search system searchtape system seek system styles system service system dialogs system spell system templates system title entry 225 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries Standard Name Q_ UNKNOWN Q_USERROOT Q_WEBACC_FORMS Q_WEBPUB_FORMS Translation wires unknown people system webforms system webforms Words Dictionary site dict words 226 The Words
113. OR_AR x86 PROCESSOF_ID x86 Family 6 Model 1 Stepping 6 Genuinelntel PROCESSOR_LE 6 PROCESSOR_RE 0106 windir ZSystemRoot SEE NENENEENE NEE NESE 4 Environment J Executive Ez Key a FileRenameOperations String Value 4 KnownDLLs inary Val I Memory Management E SubSystems H E SessionManager I Setup H E SystemResources E TimeZonelnformation E Update VirtualDeviceDrivers 4 gt Adds a new DWORD value 274 Environment Variables Registry Values All iNEWS newsroom computer system environment variables are set up and stored in the same location on each workstation After opening the Registry Editor window navigate to the following folder also called a key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Control Session Manager Environment On workstations running the Windows NT based operating system there are two keys with similar names SessionManager and Session Manager The one called Session Manager with a space between the two words must be used Environment Variables Registry Values Environment variables or registry values are sometimes required to set up certain INEWS features at various INEWS Workstations Environment variables are located and defined in the Registry of INEWS Workstations that is Windows based PCs running the Client software The following variables are covered in this section e CCColor DestinationOrder e MailLooku
114. PAUSE S_CSTOP S_CHELP S_CESCAPE S_CECHO S_CHEOL S_CTYPE S_CWAIT S_CMESS S_CEXPECT S_CDELAY S_CTIMER S_CPASS S_CDIAG S_CMAP S_CMAPIN S_CMAPOUT S_CAPHLP Translation RXDNET capture quit pause stop help escape echo heol type wait message expect delay timer pass diag map mapin mapout lt queue gt Capture to queue or continue after a pause Standard Name S_QUITHLP S_PAUSEHLP S_STOPHLP S_HELPHLP S_ESCHLP S_HEOLHLP S_ECHOHELP S_MAPHLP S_MAPINHLP S_MAPOUTHLP S_NXNONAME S_NXNOCONF S_NXNOPTY S_NXNODEV S_KTRANSFER S_KCANCELLED S_KDISCARDED S_KLOCAL S_KREMOTE S_KEOF Connect Dictionary site dict doac Translation End this connect session Pause capture but do not close capture story Stop capturing and close capture story Show this list of commands lt c gt Change escape character to specified character Toggle Hard End Of Line on captured data Toggle local character echo lt fromchar gt lt tochar gt map input amp output lt fromchar gt lt tochar gt map input lt fromchar gt lt tochar gt map output Computer not named System not configured No ptys available No device available transfer cancelled discarded L R EOF 233 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries Standard Name S_KEOT S_KTIMEOUT S_KUNKNOWN S_KIOPENERR S_KINOTFOUND S_KOOPENERR S_KOWRITERR S_KOCLOSERR Translation
115. RINTER display console 117 printer profile corresponding to printer ports 104 printing deleting runaway print jobs 104 system printer problems 103 problems with wires 101 procedures back up site files to tape 76 change presenter instructions text color 282 define key for delete_notify 290 define key used to advance timing bar 284 enable destination order 278 enable message mail alerts 281 enable synchronized timing 289 exit console program 117 hide groups from e mail lists 279 recover from disconnect 85 search user s last login 36 set up system service 23 start or restart queue sorting 323 processes status 105 ps command 105 purge interval database trait 323 defined 42 introduction 42 setting 323 purging stories 42 put job list command 167 Q Q SEEK 223 QIC tapes 56 350 queues backing up 60 creating a dialog 20 dictionary 223 sort 131 quiet job list command 167 R reclaiming Dead queue space 46 reconnect command 153 recording logins 38 recovering a failed system 86 recovering a story by word 69 maximum 71 red data polarity 103 references in a story 44 relative date defined 302 remote job list command 168 remove job list command 168 removing locks 122 stories 126 rename command 154 replace job list command 168 reset console control command 118 resetting a wire s modem 102 restart console command 154 restoring dictionary defaults 201 restoring from tape checking space available 72 first level
116. S Dictionary site dict mcs 00 eee 242 Device Types Used by Monitor Servers and Drivers 242 Special Strings Recognized by the Monitor Server 243 Error Messages for the Monitor Server 243 Error Messages Shared by Monitor Servers and Drivers 246 Driver Errors Sent to MCT Only 00000 00 ee 246 Driver Errors Sent to MCT amp Possibly to Console amp Mon User 246 Driver Errors Sent to User Only 000000 0 ee 247 Status Reported in Device Status Field 247 PCU Reference OVEIVIOW rae uaea E TRE e Ri eee aes Dekel E Peau 250 POCUS a ites ec E Marker nae ech elas enc d hehe age thea ey 250 Resetting a PCU aera Eaa bi deed Aen Dineen ied E a ae 251 PCU LED Displays siscch bids conde hee ae Side a ea ete 251 POULE Codes 4 6 sed ended eed de gaaneyoned ege muha vied 252 Connecting Devices to a PCU 0 eee ee 253 Locating Ports ics aa te ed oe eee oe eee eee 253 Connecting a PCU to the System 0 0 00 0 eee 253 Character Maps ASCII 7 bit Character Set 0 0 ee 255 IBM Character Set 0 0 0 eae 261 dbrestore Character Map Arabic 0000 eee eee ee 268 Sample Arabic Wire Profile 00000 eee eee 269 Environment Variables Registry EGO e ria bie te acibeens eld Dake ee a ae eee 274 Environment Variables Registry Values 000 275 vii viii Appendix G COGOIOF me 45 2
117. TEM LOW ON SPACE Disconnect Program Messages Standard Name M_DISCONNECT Utility Messages Dictionary site dict messages Translation 2COMPUTER DISCONNECTED Category and Keyword Check Program Messages Standard Name M_NODEST M_DUPEDEST M_LINE M_KWFMAX M_BADQUEUE M_NOTQUEUE M_PURGEZERO M_SYSERROR M_CATLONG M_CATMAX M_CATFORM M_CATHIDE M_KWDLONG M_KWDMAX M_WNOTLAST M_SYNERROR Translation No destination found Duplicate destination Line Too many keyword distribution files Could not enter the queue Not a queue Queue is never purged System error Category code word too long Too many category codes Illegal category format Hidden category Keyword too long Too many keywords Default keyword list must be last Syntax error 205 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries Standard Name Translation M_MISSING Missing M_UNEXPCTD Unexpected M_FILENUM Maximum file number bad M_UPDATEQ UPDATE queue M_INVALIDQ Invalid destination queue Keyboard Check Program Messages Standard Name Translation M_KEYDUP Duplicate key description M_KEYRANGE Invalid key number M_KEYSEP Missing key number separator M_KEYSTART First key description does not begin with M_KEYMIN Not enough key descriptions M_KEYLONG Keyboard description contains too many characters M_KEYREP Warning a key definition contains a repeating function M_KEYFUNKY Warning badly placed exists i
118. The new translations like the ones they are replacing are as short as they can be and still remain unique Keep each translation short because there is a space limit If necessary hide commands from users by changing the command name For instance to restrict access to the order command change it to something like arrange and inform only users that you want to have access to the command To edit the dictionary file do the following 1 Select all servers at the console so changes you make are made to each server s copy of the file The enter directory andenter queue commands have their translations stored in site dict ccucmds This procedure uses the ed line editor See Appendix H for more information Customizing Dictionaries Open site dict ecucmds for editing by typing ed site dict ccucmds A message similar to the following appears editing site dict ccucmds 1824 Move to the line containing the standard name enter directory by typing enter directory e ad Change e dtoma d by typing s e d ma d enter directory ma d Change the translation for enter queue in the same way enter queue ma q Type w lowercase w to save your changes to disk and type q to quit edit Ww 1826 q To change a default dictionary value do the following 1 Edit the dictionary file See the previous procedure Type a message like the following NRCS A broadcast System going
119. U to clear its memory so that you can load a fresh set of programs To do this press the Reset button and let go The PCU tests its hardware and boots up to a point where you can restart it from the console A PCU built to resemble a CCU has one or two LED displays with four digits each It uses the LED display to indicate whether it is running normally has just been reset or has detected an error As long as the PCU is running normally the LED displays the PCU s device number If the LED goes out the PCU may have lost power so make certain the power switch is in the on position and the PCU s power cord is firmly attached to the PCU and power supply PCUs produced in regular PC housings do not have LED displays As the PCU tests itself it shows a number of status codes on the LED display When DOS boots on the PCU it displays 8000 If the PCU passes all its diagnostic tests and receives an IP address from a bootp server it displays 0000 indicating that it has successfully completed the self test and is ready to be restarted If the PCU continues to display 8000 there is a network or bootp problem A PCU displays 8888 after receiving a reset request from the host server After it has been restarted and is operational it displays its device number the device number is not divided by 10 PCU LED Displays There are standard codes that can appear on the PCU s LED display The 8000 codes are typica
120. Up the iNEWS System Backing up System Site Files Your system uses site files in combination with software taken from your release CD and update tapes When you do a software backup both your system software and site files are copied to tape If something happens to your software backup you may recover your programs from the release CD but your site files could be lost In addition to backing up the software back up your site files on a separate tape If anything happens to the software backup you can use your release CD and site file backup to rebuild your system software Make a new site file backup after making significant changes to any site file For instance adding a printer to your system requires that you modify your configuration file site config and create a new printer profile After making these changes make a new software backup and then make a new site file backup To make a separate sitedump tape for each server repeat this procedure on each server After backing up a server s site files ensure you label the tape to clearly indicate which server s site files are on it The sitedump Command 76 The sitedump command backs up files in the site directory and certain key files in the etc directory This is where all of your site specific configuration files are kept The tape should be updated whenever you make changes to your configuration To back up your system s site files to tape 1 Insert the tape in
121. WORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type DWORD in the Registry Editor Type the name of the new value PIColor Press Enter To set the Value data option gt Right click on the PIColor value gt Choose Modify from the pop up menu The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears Environment Variables Registry Values Edit DWORD Value Value name PIColor Value data Base E Hexadecimal C Decimal Cancel gt Set the Value data using the following hexadecimal format 0x0 0RRGGBB where RR GG BB are two bytes for each color The leftmost two bytes 00 are not used Also If the PIColor has its value set to zero 0 the closed captioning text is black because zero corresponds to the color Black gt Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box 8 Close the Registry Editor window RGB Hexadecimal Color Chart Avid s PIColor and CCColor environment variables require RGB Hexadecimal Color codes The following are some basic colors along with their corresponding hexidecimal code values Complete RGB Hexadecimal Color Charts with various color shades can be found on the Internet RGB Hexadecimal Color Chart Color Hex Default Black 000000 Blue 0000FF 283 Appendix F Environment Variables Color Hex Default Brown 330000 Green 008800 Default color for CCColor Orange FF6600 Pink CC0099 Purple 660099 Red FF0000 Default color for PI
122. You can also edit the display using the vi program and put the resulting portion into the output file named idiff out list mailbox lt name gt c lt terminal gt lt program name gt list configuration lt termid gt lt name gt list directory a f g o s u v lt name gt list group lt name name gt 139 Appendix A Command References list queue a b d f g m s v lt name gt lt record limit gt list session v p lt termid gt lt name gt list user h 1 m p r t v lt name groupname gt list Blob v lt name gt Configuration Options computer lt name gt mailbox lt number gt lt name gt Directory Options list ap lt number gt d list as lt number gt d list flags lt flags gt d The lags lt flags gt directory option allows the use of directory flags from the set SRP p 1 opLIsUGQ O N A XWFi to be used to select the directory entries to be listed To see all indexed directory entries use list flags i d To see all sequential read only and printable directory entries use list flags SRP d list form lt name gt d The form lt name gt directory option matches the directory entry queue form and story form names list mailbox lt number name gt d list ng lt group gt d list purge lt days gt lt hours gt lt hours gt d list rg lt group gt d 140 Console Server Commands list rwg lt group gt d list rwng
123. a First Level Directory 000 eee eae 64 Listing Tape Contents and Backup Dates 65 Listing Items Dumped on a Particular Date 66 Listing the Date of Each Backup 0 00055 67 Searching a Tape 2 00 cee eee 68 The searchtape Command 2 2 2000e 68 Searching a Tape for Stories 0 0 2 0 00000 69 Searching a Tape by Word s 0 000 e eee eee 69 Searching a Tape by Word and Date Range 70 Searching a Tape by Word and Day 70 Searching a Tape by Word and Month 71 Specifying a Maximum Number of Stories to Search 71 Checking for Free Space on a Database 72 Adding Blocks to the Free List 2 000 72 Restoring the Database auaa 0 cece eee 73 Disaster Recovery Planning 000 c eee eee eee eae 73 Disaster Recovery Dodump 0 0 eee ee eee eee 74 Create Minimal dbdump 22200002 000 74 Backing up Software 0 0 aea arn E a E R e a E 75 Backing up System Site Files 0 0 2 0 0 eee eee 76 The sitedump Command 000000 cece eeaes 76 Disconnects Normal System Status 0 0 eae 80 Disconnects 2 5 2 2 6 ee ie E E e E eee ea 80 Chapter 7 Appendix A Detecting a Disconnect 00 000 eee Types of Disconnect 0 0 00 cee ee Causes of Disconnects 0 00 ce
124. a cable built to carry signals the device and PCU need in a way they expect Locating Ports The back panel of a PCU built in a CCU III housing contains eight I O ports a host port a power receptacle an Ethernet connector and a power switch The power switch controls power to the PCU and should always be in the on position The power receptacle is where the power cord attaches to the PCU The host port is used to attach a diagnostic workstation to the PCU if necessary A PCU ina standard PC case looks similar to this except that eight serial T O ports are on a serial card in one of the PC s expansion slots Connecting a PCU to the System A PCU has an Ethernet connector Use this connector to attach the PCU to the Ethernet network so it can communicate with its server 253 Appendix D PCU Reference 254 Appendix E Character Maps This appendix contains character mapping code tables used by wire programs The value set in the bits wire profile option determines which of these tables the wire program uses to translate stories it receives from a wire service Unless otherwise indicated the tables contain in the first column decimal numbers sent by the wire service The other columns contain characters represented by those numbers descriptions of the characters and mapped values Also included in this appendix are examples of character mapping for Arabic wires This section contains the following e ASCI
125. abase for Errors For more information on the various commands used in this section see Appendix A 48 In the large databases typically maintained by newsrooms minor errors can develop in some stories as a result of vast amounts of information the system processes every day These errors can grow and eventually begin to damage the database if they are not removed To check stories in your database for errors use the dblines console command which examines every story in the database You can run dblines on any server while the system is online It can point out problems or errors in the structure of the database find queue corruption that must be fixed before a dbvisit is run and make some repairs It cannot reclaim unreferenced blocks adjust link counts or rebuild the free list dbvisit is required for that Since dblines examines every story in your database it requires several hours to complete its task so run dblines before you go home at night By the time you return in the morning it should be done When dblines discovers an error it ordinarily sends an error message to the console However if you run it at night you can have the system send its messages to a log file for you to review the next day To execute the command and have it send output to a log file 1 Enter superuser mode on the master computer 2 Type dblines gt tmp dblines log You can use the at command to schedule the dblines command to run at
126. ading 0x Hex leading Next characters as characters Console Server Commands leading Negative number leading _ Two character compose sequence leading strftime format subsequent numbers formatted with format for local and gmt times leading L locale to use for date formats This command converts numbers from one base such as decimal to another such as octal For instance to convert decimal 32 type otod 32 A message similar to the following appears h 0x20 0 040 d 32 u 32 SP 32 0 0 0 Wed Dec 31 16 00 32 1969 In this listing h stands for hexadecimal o for octal d for decimal and u for unsigned decimal The number conversions are followed by the corresponding ASCII character space in this case and the date value The 32 0 0 0 is the number shown in IP address format The and L options can assist you in handling different locale settings and formats The following are two examples Type otod X 32 A message similar to the following appears h 0x20 0 040 d 32 u 32 SP 0 0 0 32 Wed Dec 31 18 00 32 1969 lcl 18 00 32 gmt 00 00 32 Type otod Lfr 32 151 Appendix A Command References A message with the date in French similar to the following appears locale is fr h 0x20 0 040 d 32 u 32 SP 0 0 0 32 mercredi 31 d cembre 1969 18 00 32 print print lt printer gt lt command gt Redirects the output from any console command into a story in th
127. ages 55 206 Keyboard Check Program Messages for Macros 207 Grpcheck Messages 00 0 e eee eee 209 Wire Program Messages 0000 e eee eee 210 Mail Server Messages 000 cece eee eee 211 Validation Action Server 0 0 00 eee 211 Seek Server Messages 0000 cece eee 211 Last Login MessageS asuaan eee eee eee 212 Messages for Print Server 0 0 eee eee eee 213 Message for the Sony Barcode Printer 213 dbtraits Messages 0 0 ee ee 213 ccumsgs Dictionary site dict ccumsgs 000e0 ee eee 213 PCU Messages 0c eee eee eee 214 Commands Dictionary site dict ccucmds 0 005 217 Commands site dict ccucmds 00 eee eee 217 Job List Commands oieee aiea 00 0 c eee eee 222 Queues Dictionary site dict queues 0 00 223 Queues Dictionary 00 002 eee 224 Words Dictionary site dict words 0 00 eee eee eee 226 Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Connect Dictionary site dict doac 0 0 0 eee ee 230 Telex Dictionary site dict telex 0 0 eee 234 Dial Dictionary site dict dial 0 0 0 cece eee 236 Keyboard Macros Dictionary site dict keymacros 237 Printer Messages Dictionary site dict printmsgs 239 Case shifting Dictionary site dict shift 000005 240 MC
128. ain system security 40 Chapter 4 Database Management This chapter provides you with information required to manage the iNEWS database where all business data such as stories is stored Much of the iNEWS system data is stored in configuration files which is covered in the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual This chapter contains the following main sections e Monitoring Free Space e Tracking Database Space over Time Increasing Database Space for Immediate Use e Maintaining the Database Chapter 4 Database Management Monitoring Free Space 42 The iNEWS newsroom computer system is constantly collecting wire stories and adding them to the database while the news staff adds scripts rundowns memos assignment sheets and other stories To keep from running out of disk space iNEWS tracks old stories As stories get old the system purges them Distribution and purging of disk space is called the database cycle In this cycle wire stories are collected and stored in the database for a specific interval of time Other news items such as scripts and assignment sheets are created by the news staff and also kept for a preset period of time called the purge interval which is set individually for each queue Any story older than its queue s purge interval is purged and its space is reclaimed for new stories The purge interval is a database trait so you can set different purge intervals for
129. anaging Traits at the Console You can change more than one trait at a time For instance to give this user keyboard 3 and make SHOW RUNDOWN his destination queue type NRCS A utraits danielmi key 3 dest show rundown 1 user record modified NRCS A Changing a Users Password 298 To change Smith s password to changeme 1 Log on as a superuser 2 Type the utraits command using the following format utraits lt username gt password lt newpassword gt For instance NRCS A utraits smith password changeme 1 user records modified NRCS A Since everything you type at the console is recorded in console history consider using the force command to require the user to change their password the next time they log in This will help prevent someone from using passwords obtained from the console history For users who do not change their passwords as instructed use the force console command to require them to change passwords at their next login The following is the force console command format force lt user or group names gt The most common way to use this command is to require a particular user or users to change their password the next time they log in For instance suppose that you have been unable to convince Mitchell and Schofield to change their passwords As a last resort to require that they do so the next time they log in log on as a superuser and type the following NRCS A force mitchell schofield
130. anging their entries in your system s dictionary files Remove your custom dictionary translations by reverting to the default settings for command names message text and other items Create templates for the CG Title Entry tool Design and assign custom keyboards for users with a unique set of keyboard macros Storage Maintenance Tasks You will want to monitor the database regularly to ensure adequate storage Storage maintenance tasks include 15 Chapter 1 Introduction Device Tasks 16 Monitor how much free space is available in the database and if necessary increase the amount to prevent the system from running out of space Perform preventive database maintenance by periodically running certain utility programs that can find and fix minor problems before they become serious Backup the entire database or portions of it onto tape so if necessary the information can be restored to the database later Make a backup copy of files such as the site file on tape any time you make important changes A device is any kind of hardware or software that performs a specific function when it is set up on the iNEWS system Your responsibilities regarding devices include List the parameters of any device running on your system or list all devices of one type Add any type of device to your system if you have the capacity and license permission Edit site specific files to change the setup information for a device
131. ard input up to an end of file condition ed lt file pathname gt This command initiates the line editor used to edit text files Since each server has its own copy of each site file always select all servers before editing a site file Procedures for using this line editor are covered in Appendix H The line editor is a Linux supplied program refer to Linux documentation for more information force Superuser only grpcheck gtraits Superuser only Console Server Commands force force q lt name gt force q created gt datel lt date2 lt name gt force q lastlog gt datel lt date2 lt name gt force q passchg gt datel lt date2 lt name gt When using angled brackets gt lt in a parameter they must be enclosed within quotation marks The same applies to characters such as the exclamation point and asterisk This command forces users to change their password For instance to force user Harris to change her password type Eorce harris grpcheck v lt group story queue gt This command validates groups and aliases defined in each of the stories in the group directory SYSTEM GROUP by default It then builds the alias file used by iINEWS grpcheck Command Options v Display processing status as grpcheck traverses the queue vv Display processing status as well as group user and alias statistics encountered vvv Display messages from v and vv as well as t
132. are flexible enough to script entire connect sessions For instance a dialog could be constructed to automatically log in to the remote console and unbusy a rundown if desired The available dialog commands are reviewed in Appendix A Here are a few examples of dialogs for remote console connect services SLUG CREATED console 5 20 91 16 24 59 diag off capture system capture delay 10 a Adding System Services In the example lt cr gt and lt 1 gt are used to Slug Tal Created by indicate a carriage console news return and line feed escape lt 26 gt message Connecting to the console lt cr gt lt lf gt message Remember Do not restart devices from a connect session lt cr gt lt lf gt message Logout by CTRL D not by closing windowl lt cr gt lt lf gt capture system capture pass Adding System Services A service consists of two parts e A network resource set up as a device in the configuration file site config e The service set up in the service table in the database file SYSTEM SERVICE it uses the resource to make a connection To add a new service to your system you must design and build the service and select a network resource for the service to use If an appropriate resource does not exist create one Setting up the Service To set up the service and its resource 1 See if the service and its resource exists Try connecting to a s
133. are should be taken when removing edit locks Do not unbusy stories that users are still working in If you do when they try to save the story it will be saved to the Dead queue You may see messages on the console about edit locked busy stories in the Dead queue A large number of edit locked stories at the bottom of the Dead queue can cause problems and they should be unbusied The Dead queue is usually large and an unbusy on the entire queue could take a long time to execute To unbusy edit locked stories in the Dead queue 1 Enter superuser mode on the console 2 Use the unbusy command to remove the edit locks NRCS A unbusy i dead Wire Problems The i option allows the unbusy command to ignore the inverted attribute 3 The system will prompt you for confirmation After answering yes to unbusy the stories watch for when the system is no longer finding busy stories You can then break out of the unbusy process with Ctr1 Control backslash or use the Delete key to interrupt the unbusy process Wire Problems Data Receiver PCU Wire Ports This section explains common problems users may encounter with their wire ingests during daily operation The Avid Data Receiver provides an Administration application that may be used to troubleshoot most issues related to ingesting wires to INEWS using a Data Receiver instance For more information see the Avid Data Receiver Installation and Operations Manual
134. ate user accounts were created e Users currently logged in At the console you can determine attempted and successful logins 35 Chapter 3 Database Security Tracking User Login Activity and Date Created You can search for a user account s last login and the date the user account was created from an INEWS Workstation At an iNEWS Workstation At the Console 36 To search for a user s last login 1 Select Tools gt Options gt Users The Manage User Accounts dialog box appears 2 Click Advanced The Advanced Search Settings dialog box appears 3 Click Date Range 4 Do one of the following gt To search for user accounts with a last login date that matches a specified date range click Last Login gt To search for user accounts created within a specified date range click Account Created 5 Specify a date range in the From and To fields 6 Click OK 7 Click Search The requested user name information appears Another command you can type at the console will give you valuable information about users list u t lt username gt This command shows the date and time a user account was created date and time of last login and date and time of last password change If you do not specify a particular user name to check you will get a listing for all users Tracking User Activity Listing Users Currently Logged in From the iNEWS Workstation you can see a list of all users logged in and
135. atic data conversions are performed to convert data from older database revisions to the current database format Conversion from the Avid NetStation database format is controlled with conversion parameters stored in a database conversion profile file normally site dict conversion or optionally specified with the dbrestore c option For NetStation dbdumps existing form Console Server Commands templates stored in directory records and in stories will be converted to form names consisting of three digits See the qform and sform database traits If your database is damaged you can restore it from your backup tape by typing dbrestore div When you use dbrestore restoring large numbers of stories can cause a temporary out of space condition Press Delete to stop a dbrestore in progress dbrestore Command Key Options Keys s Restore stories only d Restore stories with their original directories i Restore ISAM files v Verbose output list directory names vyv List directory names and each title x Ask before restoring each ISAM file f Print facts about blocks and times t Print table of contents do not restore Options a lt device gt Restore from alternate device c lt filename gt Database conversion profile filename C lt filename gt Character map filename d lt date gt lt date gt f file Restore from a file use for standard input 129 Appendix A Command References dbserver 13
136. ber gt lt speed gt lt bits gt lt file gt lt count gt or wiredump lt device number gt lt speed gt lt bits gt lt code rotate gt lt style gt lt bits gt Bits per character 5 6 7 or 8 or speed options as interpreted by the ccuspeed program lt file gt File name for collected data lt count gt Number of bytes of data to collect lt code gt b for Baudot t for TTS a for ASCII w for Wire ASCII or e for 8 bit ASCII rotate 1 7 to rotate right lt x gt bits 8 for one s complement 010 gt 101 9 for inversion 123 gt 321 If a problem exists with your wires you may need to use this command to collect raw wire data so it can be sent to iNEWS for testing The wiredump command can also be used for debugging format changes made by a wire service A wire dump can be sent to the screen or to a disk file For instance if device 35 is a 1200 baud ASCII 7 bit wire type the following to print the first 200 characters to the screen wiredump 35 1200 7 ac Job List Commands To dump wire data to a file use the following format The file name refers to the output file into which the wiredump data is placed It should include the name of the wire and be preceded by the tmp directory name The count is measured in number of bytes For instance if device 35 is the APTV wire to capture the first 2000 characters type wiredump 35 1200 tmp aptv raw 2000 A display similar to the following appears
137. by doing the following a Click Start iNEWS Workstation Problems b Select Programs gt MSDOS Prompt to open a DOS window The name and location of this submenu option may vary depending on the Windows based operating system For instance it may appear at Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt on some PCs c Enter the following command substituting the name of your server C gt ping nrcs a A message similar to the following should appear Pinging nrcs a 10 1 38 30 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 10 1 38 30 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 255 Reply from 10 1 38 30 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 255 Reply from 10 1 38 30 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 255 C gt If you do not get replies then the server is either down or a networking problem exists A message similar to one of the following may appear Bad IP address nrcs a OR Bad host nrcs a The iNEWS Workstation is unable to look up the name to obtain the IP address of the server It is unable to resolve the host name This indicates the name entered in the login dialog box does not exist in the local hosts file on the PC or on the Domain Name Server DNS if your network is configured to use a DNS The workdebug 2 If the workstation can successfully ping the server the next step is to command may be used run the workdebug stat command on each server at the console 1n system operator or superuser mode 97 Chapter 7 Troubleshoot
138. cg inlvnd 1007 noon SPORTS cg nl 950 cg al 951 cg nfl 952 cg cf 953 cg nba 954 cg cbb 955 cg nhl 956 cg prep 957 cg scr 960 Anchors Reporters cg sa 104 cg salv 105 cg sasky 107 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 16 SYSTEM RESOURCE from skycam 1 line scenes from noonday 2 line interview noon live locator noon live 2 line interview mational league jamerican league nfl college football nba college basketball nhl high school score lower third steve aveson steve aveson live steve aveson skycam 191 Appendix B System Files SYSTEM WIRES DISTRIBUTION AP medc2 wires medsource AP Henv wires environmental APHHHHHHaH wires national APHHHHHHCH wires features APHHHHHHGH wires summaries APHHHHHHE wires features APHHHHHHE wires business APHHHHHHGH wires state regional APHHHHHHhE wires summaries APHH HHHH IH wires international APHHHHHH wires state regional APH HHHHHHMH wires farm APH HHHHHHNH wires state regional APHHHHHHO wires weather APHH HH HHHDH wires politics APHH HH HHHGH wires sports all APHH HH HHHGH wires sports scores APHHHHHH LH wires advisory other APHH HHHHHSH wires sports all APHH HHHHHSH wires sports stories AP nbc t wires newschannel APHHHHHHCH wires advisory other APHHHHHHUH wires state regional APHHHHHHVE wires advisory other APHHHHHHVE wires daybook APHHHHHH WH wires national APHHHHHHHH wires unknown APHHHHHHHH wires ap ALWAYS APHHH
139. counts 125 Appendix A Command References dboriginal 126 Valid Keys Description x For qstamp checking The dblines program normally will not fix script related errors if you want to do so the S option must be specified and the n option must not be specified Use this command weekly as part of normal database maintenance Start dblines before you go home and run it in the background To run dblines in the background precede dblines witha print command Including a period with the command checks the entire database For instance to run dblines in the background and send any error messages to system printer 2 type print 2 dblines Ifdblines finds any errors related to queue corruption call Avid Customer Support for assistance dboriginal a lt pathname gt Removes all old versions of stories in a queue to the freelist so use it only on queues where you do not need to retain these old versions For instance to remove the old story versions in ARCHIVE MARCH type dboriginal archive march Use the dboriginal command to reclaim space when the system is low on space The dboriginal command will print diagnostics indicating how many stories were examined and how many old versions were removed The command removes old versions for unshared stories those with a link count of 1 in a queue The option a allows the command to remove old versions from all stories shared and unshared As indicated by the p
140. ctionaries M_BGSRQNAQ Results Queue not a queue M_BGSRQNPM No write permission for results queue M_BGSINVLD Invalid Search M_BGSEOP end of path M_BGSMAXH max hits M_BGSSPI Invalid search path M_BGSRQI Invalid results queue M_BGSRQOE Open error on results queue M_BGSDONE Done M_BGSSTOPPED Stopped M_BGSCANCELLED Cancelled M_BGSSYNTAXERROR Syntax Error M_BGSCOMMERROR Communication Error M_BGSMPAT Missing search pattern Last Login Messages M_LASTLOG Last Login M_ONDEVICE on device 212 ccumsgs Dictionary site dict ccumsgs Messages for Print Server M_PRINTER_BUSY Printer Is OFFLINE Message for the Sony Barcode Printer M_NOBULKPR Bulk printing disabled dbtraits Messages M_CHANGE_GROUP 1Group form order or sortfield changed ccumsgs Dictionary site dict ccumsgs The following table shows entries used for PCUs in the ccumsgs dictionary with their default translations 213 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries 214 PCU Messages Standard Name D_AIRBEND D_AIRFEND D_AIRSTOP D_AUTHORIZED D_BACKT D_BADARG D_BADDEST D_BADKBD D_BADREP D_BUSY D_CANTFIND D_CMD D_CONTINUE D_DEFINED D_DIRMODE D_DUPED D_EMPTY D_ERROR D_EXISTS D_GONE D_HOME D_INSERT Translation End backwards End forward Stopped Not allowed Backtime Bad argument Bad destination Bad keyboard Must FIND First Busy Can t find CMD Press CMD to continue Text is defi
141. d Write Group To set a queue s write group use dbtraits lt queue name gt wg lt group name gt For instance to assign a write group of producers to the queue SHOW 5PM type dbtraits show 5pm wg producers To list all queues in the database with a particular group assigned as their write group use list wg lt group name gt d To list all queues in the database with a particular group assigned as their read or write group use list rwg lt group name gt d Notify Group To set a queue s notification group use dbtraits lt queue name gt ng lt group name gt For instance to assign a notification group of producers to the queue WIRES WAR type dbtraits wires war ng producers Managing Group Traits at the Console To list all queues in the database that have a particular group assigned as their notification group use list ng lt group name gt d Restricting Access Using Read and Write Limitations In addition to restricting access to various queues you can use group access and usage restrictions to hide queues or directories by placing a strict read restriction on them For instance the System directory is usually restricted so that only superusers can write stories there You can hide this directory so it does not appear in the main directory for normal users Set its read group to a group with no users such as sysop Because system administrators can read everything in the database they can see
142. d is invoked when the system is booted and runs in the background continually monitoring the number of free database blocks based on the high and low water marks specified in the system profile dbsort v lt queue name gt The dbsort command sorts stories in any queue by the quick index field and should primarily be used to verify that the quick index field accurately reflects the story sort field contents For instance if RUNDOWN AM has the page number field set as its quick index field type the following to sort the queue by page number dbsort rundown am If no quick index field has been set for the queue its stories are sorted by the value of the title field If a sorted queue is ordered the sorting is disabled Using dbsort starts the sorting again Only a superuser can sort queues with nonzero write groups Dbtraits will automatically sort a queue when the sort attribute is turned on with the so option An ordered queue is automatically sorted when the ordered attribute is turned off with the o option Use the v option to verify the sort field The system checks that the quick index field in the database has the same data as the sort field in the story This option provides no sorting function but it updates the quick index field so that your next sort is based on current information dbtraits lt pathname gt only lt option gt lt value gt mode dbtraits Command Options abstractlines or al queueform or
143. datel lt date2 u lt user or group names gt The datel and date2 parameters are not surrounded with greater than and less than characters here as is customary for parameters These characters are also used in the command alone and this could cause confusion You must follow passchg with a date This date may be a relative date an absolute date or a date range Also there must be no spaces between passchg and the date or date range or the List u command does not work correctly A relative date is one that you specify as some time prior to the present date asin list passchg lt 90 u In the previous example we used a rela tive date to find out which users had last changed their password prior to Modifying User Traits from the Console 90 days ago Remember ending the number with a period indicates that the value is in days no period indicates hours An absolute date specifies an actual calendar date In the following example we use an absolute date to find out which users last changed their passwords before August 5 2004 by typing the following list passchg lt 05AUG2004 u Information similar to the following appears User DEV Date Created Last Login Last Password mitchell495 02JAN2004 10 55am24JUL2004 9 00am O7JAN2004 9 50am You must specify absolute dates in DDMMMYYYY format You must enter the days in double digit format meaning you must add a leading zero to single digit days such as 05 Also you
144. display method designator to determine if the message should be displayed in the status bar or as a pop up message This display method designator is based on the first character of the message definition A display designator of 1 denotes that the message will appear on the status bar A display designator of 2 denotes the message displays as a pop up dialog in addition to being displayed in the status bar and alerts history The default display method will be a 1 ifno display designator is specified Pop up dialogs do not steal focus away from the user or interrupt their work This section describes these utility messages in the following tables 203 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries For information on the display method designator appearing in the message definition see note on page 203 For information on the display method designator appearing in the message definition see note on page 203 204 e DBServer Program Messages e Disconnect Program Messages e Category and Keyword Check Program Messages e Keyboard Check Program Messages e Keyboard Check Program Messages for Macros e Grpcheck Messages e Wire Program Messages e Mail Server Messages e Validation Action Server e Seek Server Messages e Last Login Messages e Messages for Print Server e Message for the Sony Barcode Printer e dbtraits Messages DBServer Program Messages Standard Name Translation M_NOSPACE 2NO SPACE IN SYSTEM M_LOWSPACE SYS
145. displays them on the console screen If you are getting no wires and no wire dump it may be possible the wire modem is feeding the signal with the wrong polarity The only way to determine polarity is to hook up a mini tracker and examine the pin 3 light as data is received Pin 3 should flicker green as data flows across the connection The PCU port will not recognize red data flickering Red data indicates incorrect polarity coming from the wire equipment and must be rectified by your wire service provider Red data will appear on terminals and printers hooked to the wire output but it will not be recognized as data by the PCU port Each wire port must have a corresponding wire profile in site wires lt port gt if you need to move a wire to another PCU port For instance if you move a wire from port 17 to port 38 you must also copy its profile to the new port number with the Move mv command mv site wires 17 site wires 38 System Printer Problems When a story is printed to a system printer the print job goes to the appropriate SYSTEM PRINTERS queue The printer port communicates with the printer using xon xoff flow control The printer port starts sending a print job out the port If the printer s buffer is getting full the printer sends an xoff signal to the port telling it to stop sending data When the printer is ready to accept more of the print job it sends an xon signal telling the port to resume data flow If the p
146. dow Close key redefined Warning Discard Changes key redefined Warning Refresh key redefined Warning Toggle Story Form key redefined Warning Script Swap key redefined Warning GoTo Priority Queue key redefined Warning GoTo Alerts History key redefined Warning Communicate Message Bar key redefined Warning Communicate Message Show History key redefined Warning Communicate Open Close Mail key redefined Invalid pause interval Grpcheck Messages Standard Name M_GRPBADALIAS M_GRPBADGRP M_GRPBADDEV M_GRPERRSKIP M_GRPEXINPUT M_GRPAEXINPUT M_GRPINT M_GRPDBERR M_GRPDEVSYN M_GRPNAMUSR M_GRPNAMDUP M_GRPNONAME M_GRPALNONAME M_GRPGRPREC M_GRPINALIAS M_GRPAINGRP M_GRPMEMBAD M_GRPNIX M_GRPRESERV Utility Messages Dictionary site dict messages Translation Invalid name follows word alias Invalid name follows word group Not a workstation device Group or alias word missing Skipping text Ignoring words following group name Ignoring words following alias name Internal groupchecker error Failed to access first story Bad workstation device specification User name used as group or alias name Duplicate group or alias name Missing group name Missing alias name Recursive group membership Name already used as group name Name already used as alias name Not a user or workstation No groups or aliases found
147. e To search for stories backed up on May 15 2000 that contains the words helicopter or president type searchtap just 000515 for helicopter president Searching a Tape by Word and Month To search for stories saved to tape during a particular month follow searchtape with just and shorten the date to the year and month YYMM For instance to search a tape for any story saved to tape in February 2000 that contains helicopter type searchtape just 0002 for helicopter Specifying a Maximum Number of Stories to Search To specify a maximum number of stories for searchtape to restore include the word max and the number of stories you want to restore To search a tape for all stories that contain the word president type searchtape for president If you do not specify a maximum the system restores up to 50 stories If you specify a maximum number searchtape stops when that number of stories has been restored or when all stories containing the text have been found whichever comes first To search a tape for the first 10 stories containing president type searchtape max 10 for president Anytime you specify more than 50 stories to restore you are reminded that this could cause the system to run out of disk space When the search is complete searchtape stops and displays a message indicating the number of stories it has restored To cancel the restore operation at any time while in progress press Delete 71 Chapter 5
148. e Dead queue and prints it For instance to print the configuration file on printer 1 type print 1 cat site config query query lt pcu gt lt mcs pe devid gt query lt device gt lt qtype gt parameters Syntax lt devid gt ioregister lt devid gt iocontrol lt devid gt proc lt devid gt input lt devid gt output lt devid gt read lt addr gt lt length gt lt devid gt absread lt seg gt lt addr gt lt length gt lt devid gt writeb lt addr gt lt byte value in hex gt lt devid gt writew lt addr gt lt word value in hex gt lt devid gt abswrite lt seg gt lt addr gt lt word value in hex gt lt devid gt netstat lt devid gt bstat Tests communication between a PCU or MCS PC and its server Type query followed by the device number of the PCU or MCS PC For instance to test PCU 20 type NRCS AS query 20 152 reconnect rename Superuser only A Console Server Commands A message similar to the following appears if the PCU or MCS PC is functioning properly 1 5 1 12 DOS PCUOS OK If the system returns an OK message a few seconds after you execute the command the PCU or MCS PC is functioning properly If there is a prob lem the server displays a failed message after about a minute reconnect lt name gt lt option gt lt value gt The options for this command are the same as for the connect command Enter the correct identifier such as A B C
149. e apart To tie together all blocks each block contains a reference to the block containing the next part of the story A block is either in use or free Monitoring the Free List The free list is the list of free space on the disk By keeping track of space in the free list the system can detect when it is running low on space It runs an automatic dbserver program which removes the oldest stories from the Dead queue and adds the space to the free list where it is made available to the system This way dbserver maintains the volume of free space available in the database The free list measures space in blocks a block 1024 bytes and has a lower limit called the low watermark which represents the least amount of free space available When the space available drops below the low watermark the system runs dbserver to reclaim enough space from the Dead queue to rebuild the free list to the high watermark Together the high and low watermarks determine the free list s normal operational range If the system cannot get back up to the high watermark after reclaiming free space the user will geta low on space message Create free space immediately as explained in the following section 43 Chapter 4 Database Management Understanding How the System Copies Stories You can configure iNEWS to distribute a wire story to several queues when it is received Likewise two or more users can put copies of the same story into t
150. e console stops at the line last displayed on the screen and your position in the history moves to that line reset Attempts to unfreeze one or more of the console s I O ports if communication has failed between the console and your system s servers To use reset select the servers that are affected press the Com mand key and type the command The command may be abbreviated typing r or reset will work top Moves you to the oldest line in recent console history To see history older than this use the view command to view a history disk log file 118 Keyword up number of lines keyword view lt drive filename gt Console Control Commands Explanation Moves you backward up some number of lines in the history up number of lines moves you that many lines back in the history For example typing up 30 moves you back 30 lines If you follow up with a number greater than the number of lines between your current position and the first line in the history the up command moves you to the first line in the history e up keyword searches backward through the history from your current position for that word For example to search backward for a line containing dbpurge type up dbpurge The up command is not case sensitive If you specify PEOPLE people isa valid match If the system does not find the keyword before reaching the top of the history the console beeps and you are returned to the current line u
151. e contains the information your oganization needs to function A system administrator s tasks associated with the database include e Design forms that is story templates to display important information about stories in a queue e Monitor changes to files and queues in the database e Unlock or delete any item in the database and recover items that were accidentally deleted or corrupted e Create new folders or queues in the iNEWS system database to meet your organization s expanding needs e Remove a directory or queue from the database if it is no longer used e Change the name or traits of an existing directory or queue Security Tasks System Administrator Tasks Assign the mailbox trait to queues for configuring automatic story distribution into and out of queues There are many ways to ensure the security of your iNEWS system Your responsibilities regarding system security include e Monitor and change passwords or force users to change them by setting up system checks and modifications Monitor user login activity to guard against unauthorized use of the iNEWS system Assign security to a directory or queue limiting access to a specific group of users Restrict database access by placing users into security groups based on job roles and need for information Customizing the System Your responsibilities regarding customization include Customize command names message text and other items by ch
152. e directory name with the word only This is the opposite of the way traits are assigned using the iNEWS Workstation See the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual for more information on viewing database traits For instance to turn on the Scripts directory s Sequential trait s without also turning it on for any of the Scripts subdirectories or queues type dbtraits scripts only s 311 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console Database Traits Console Command Summary 312 Name Sequential Read Access The following Database Traits Summary table is a summary of iNEWS database traits SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT as seen and used in connec tion with the dbtraits command at the console These traits may also appear in a GUI format at the iNEWS Workstation For more on database traits see the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configura tion Manual Database Traits Summary Location in Display SRPlo LIsUGQSXWFiT SRP1o LISUGQSXWFiT SRP1o LISUGQSXWFiT Mode Option Keyword s s r r Definition Example Lists directories or queues in the order in which they were created The default is alphabetical To order the RUNDOWN 5PM sequentially dbtraits rundown 5pm s Indicates whether or not stories in the queue are in read only mode To set the SHOW 5PM SCRIPTS queue to read only mode type dbtraits show 5pm scripts r When this mode is turned off users op
153. e ee ee Disconnect Recovery 00 cece eee eee OVOIWIOW EE ak ceed fe dae tose TREE de tad tote Sak Sa ld ea ee Procedures cicrdredigd che eledat pd ee nied todd speeded es Recovery Worksheet 0 00 e eee eae Troubleshooting iNEWS Workstation Problems 20200 cece eeeee A User Cannot Login 0 0 0 cee ee A User Cannot Establish a Session 0000 eee aes A User Cannot Access an Item 00000200 eee eeee Group Permissions 00000e0e cece ee eeeee BUSY SOngs ua tite fn eh et a i erie a 2 e it Wire Problems 2200 0c e eee eee eee eens Data Receiveri stanci aa aXe dated de had Pad be id a A PCU Wire Ponts oria i peier n u Ree e ae a a a E ae Etn IE eaa System Printer Problems auaa Locked BIOCKS ean ek Mon ced bose a a eel N e ates How to Check Process Status ps Command Power Failures 23 4204 os44 4 00 edd poeaneed tadeea a ered aged s Network Failure 00000 a aiana k a a a a eee netstat i Command ssaa anaana aaa Output Errors Oerrs 0 2 sidre skivan Edn DEP ESE iea F Input Errors lerrs 2 Erea E Ea T EA E ENEE iNEWS and FTS Connectivity ftsdebug Command Checking Communication between iNEWS and FTS Servers Command References Programs Invoked by iNEWS 0 00 eee eee eee Commands Used by Avid Personnel Only 2 00 Linux Com
154. e in extracting the program W_MONTHS JanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepO ct NovDec You can change these translations only once If you make a mistake or want to change them again you must extract the news program from the release CD first Call iNews Customer Support for assistance in extracting the program W_PAGE page Words Relating to the Seek Server W_FAST fast W_ACTIVE ACTIVE W_DONE DONE W_ERROR W_ABORT ABORTED W_MBSPACE i This token applies to multibyte iNEWS systems only It must be set to the multibyte space character of the code set being used W_DELIMITERS lt sp gt W_PENDING PENDING W_RESTRICTED restricted 228 Standard Name W_SLOW W_BREAK Words relating to FTS Server W_INDEXBASE W_BINDFTSI W_BINDFTSS W_AGEWEIGHT W_HITSWEIGHT W_LOCWEIGHT Miscellaneous Options W_DEFAULT_FORM W_WEBACC_FORM W_WEBPUB_FORM W_LOGTYPES W_ERROR W_INDXD W_DEST W_QUEUE W_RESULTS_FORM W_START W_OFF W_LOAD W_UNLOAD W_YES Words Dictionary site dict words Translation C FTS FTSINDEX ftsserver 6100 ftsserver 6101 100 0 0 default_form access_form publish_form D ERROR only seek archvd destination queue search results ON OFF LOAD UNLOAD yes 229 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries Standard Name W_NO W_GROUP W_ALIAS W_ANYSTR W_BLANKSTR W_PAGEBREAK W_RESTRICTED W_NEAR W_RUNS W_STARTMEDIA W_CUE_REF Translation no group a
155. e or more keywords with a date or range of dates as described in the following sections 2 When the system finds a story matching the search criteria it restores the story to the database Because stories on tape may be old versions of stories still in the database the system restores them to the SYSTEM SEARCHTAPE queue This prevents the system from putting an old version of a story in a queue that contains the current version of the same story After restoring a story to SYSTEM SEARCHTAPE you can move it to any queue Before restoring stories from tape check how much free space remains in your database at the console See Checking for Free Space on a Database on page 72 for more information Searching a Tape by Word s To search a tape by word s follow the searchtape command with the word for and the word s for which you want to search Use this form of the command searchtape for lt words gt If you include more than one search word the system searches for stories that contain any words for which you are searching You can search for up to 20 words at a time with this command For instance to search for stories that contain either helicopter or president type searchtape for helicopter president A message similar to the following appears 8 stories restored to SYSTEM SEARCHTAPE 69 Chapter 5 Backing Up the iNEWS System 70 This command finds stories with the word president and it also
156. e selected the dovisit command runs in read only mode on the other servers but running it on all of them allows you to compare their outputs and verify the database is mirrored on each server The dbvisit command continues to run on the master computer The dbvisit process has four main phases e Visiting the root blocks e Visiting the directory and queue structures e Visiting the stories e Rebuilding the free list and fixing link counts 4 When the system prompts you with Rebuild the free list y n do the following a Ensure dbvisit has completed on all servers otherwise error messages may appear 52 Maintaining the Database b Type y only if there are no error messages If there are any error messages among the periods printed after traversing directory do not rebuild the free list and contact Avid Customer Support immediately for instructions OR Type n to skip rebuild of the free list Skipping rebuild of the free list retains the old free list While this means that unreferenced blocks are not collected back to the free list you can add them to the free list later by performing another dbvisit If there are link count discrepancies the system will list them Such advisory messages about high and low link counts are not errors however you will be prompted to correct them Rebuilding a free list without first fixing the errors seriously corrupts your database 5 If you do not see any error messa
157. e this display suppress it with the q option You may want to use the force command to require all users who last changed their passwords prior to a certain date to change their passwords the next time they log in You can do this by specifying a date in the command as shown in the previous format description 299 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console The force command recognizes dates in the same way the list u console command does you can specify relative dates absolute dates and date ranges This command applies only to people who last changed their passwords within the date parameter you set If you specify a value for the date parameter the force console command works only on those users who are among those you specify and whose last password change falls within the criteria set by the date parameter For instance the following command affects only those members of the producers group who last changed their password before July 5 2004 NRCS A force passchg lt 05JUL2004 producers To force all users to change their passwords put a hyphen in place of any user or group names This is especially useful in combination with a date parameter For instance to force all users who last changed their passwords more than 90 days ago become a superuser and type the following NRCS A force passchg lt 90 A message similar to the following appears Users who will be forced to make password changes on next login
158. e trait 321 sorting stories 131 source job list command 169 space blocks 43 free list 43 hogs command 45 increasing in the database 46 reclaiming 46 usage 44 SRPlo LIsUGQSXWFi explained 312 startup after power failure 122 startup command 158 status of passwords 31 stop console command 159 351 Index stop dialog command 175 storage units 43 stories cannot read or write 98 error checking 126 export in case of disconnect 81 how the system copies 44 purging 42 references 44 removes old versions 126 retrieve backup from tape 128 sort 131 storing copies 44 unbusying 99 superuser console command 159 synctoserver 288 system adding services 23 list all computers 153 security 29 40 system access group security 39 system administrator basics 13 customization 15 database tasks 14 security 15 storage maintenance 15 troubleshooting 17 user tasks 14 SYSTEM directory hiding 331 restricting 331 system failure recovering 86 system servers FTS 109 SYSTEM DIALOG 27 SYSTEM DIALOG directory 20 SYSTEM PRINTERS 103 SYSTEM SEARCHTAPE queue 68 352 SYSTEM SERVICE 23 T table formatting heol command 174 tape contents listing 65 tapes backup 123 listing contents 59 loading 56 rotating dumps 56 test communication 152 timer dialog command 175 setting 175 TK 50 tapes 56 top console control command 118 tracking database space 44 tracking user login activity 36 trait listing inverted 309 read only 309 sequen
159. ecific directory be sure to always include the n and the directory name If you do not dbrestore tries to restore everything on the tape to your database which could cause your system to run out of space Restoring Data to the INEWS Database You may not restore a first level directory to a lower level In the example above for instance we could not have restored the Scripts directory to SCRIPTS MAY When you restore a first level directory to an existing directory it acquires the traits of that directory If dbrestore must create the directory it uses database traits of the directory it is restoring A If the new directory name is longer than the old one there is a possibility that sub directory names may become too long and cannot be restored When the new name is longer than the old name the dbrestore program will prompt with the following warning message WARNING Alias too long It should be shorter or the same length as current directory name to avoid exceeding directory name length restrictions Do you really want to continue n y Listing Tape Contents and Backup Dates When restoring a directory you may need to examine the tape s contents to ensure the directory you want to restore is actually on that tape Otherwise if you attempt to restore a directory or queue that is not on the tape the system may take several minutes to search the entire tape before reporting no stories restored The pages that follow show
160. ectory then returns to the original directory When processing files in a directory the makeshift program ignores additional directory pathnames it encounters rather than recursively scanning child directories To have makeshift scan all files ina directory specify the directory path in the filename list maketab Superuser only msgclean Console Server Commands maketab il sv maketab Command Options s Standard translations v Verbose output Use this command after making changes to the dictionaries or before the system is connected to build the new translations into programs To use this command first stop all PCUs Then become a superuser and type maketab i The usage for the maketab is the same as the makeccutab For maketab the dictionary definitions are installed into the following programs exc news exc gnews exc snews exc nxserver and exc newsmail Day and month abbreviation definitions are installed into exc news exc gnews exc snews exc nxserver exc newsmail exc telex exc rxnet and exc server msgclean r d o t lt username gt lt number of days gt msgclean Command Options r Remove invalid messages d Show messages that are removed 0 Show outstanding messages t Tabulate outstanding messages lt username gt Specified user use for wildcard match H lt days gt Older than number of days When using characters such as angled brackets gt lt
161. ed Warning Large story being restored Queue FUTURES FEBRUARY Title Senate Hearing Size 1004 lines approximate Press lt del gt to skip this story If the story size continues to grow the following message prints every 1500 lines Large story continuing 1500 lines Press lt del gt to skip this story To skip the large story press Delete while it is being restored Always include for and one or more words for which you want to search when you use searchtape Even if you use a date or a date range as part of the search criteria you must include a word or words for which you want the system to search Use search criteria as specific as possible e Always use a narrow range of dates e Use a small number of search words e Use words likely to appear only in stories for which you are searching Disaster Recovery Planning Having a complete dbdump of the database ensures that you can restore your data in case of calamity however restoring a complete dbdump to a freshly initialized database can be very time consuming and leave the 73 Chapter 5 Backing Up the iNEWS System newsroom without access to the system until the full database dbrestore finishes On very large databases the full database dbrestore can take from 12 to 36 hours Planning a separate efficient disaster recovery dbdump dbrestore procedure can significantly speed up the time before the system becomes functional to use
162. ed stories in that queue are scanned at once The queue identified in the scan command as the priority queue is always the next queue in the multiple scan job list so if it is idle other queues are processed The system checks after every queue to see if new stories are ready for processing on the queue identified in the scan command Applies to the action and tx servers The priority option forces the server to interrupt the scan of another queue if the server receives a mailbox notification The a11 option forces the server to scan the entire queue instead of the limit of 10 stories when there are multiple queues to scan The everyent ry option forces the server to process each entry in a queue not just modified entries Deleted entries are still controlled by the send de1 option send del sendform source validate Dialog Commands send del Instructs the server to process story deletions in the scan queue this is the default behavior Use ignore del to have the server take no action when a story is deleted from a scan queue Applies to action and tx servers sendform Instructs the Tx link to transmit the full form text of each story rather than just the story s form name Applies to tx servers source lt queue name gt Specifies a queue that a distribution or keyword server should check each time it wakes up Each task in a job list for such a server must begin with a source line Applies to the distribution and keywo
163. ed to go through the recovery process as noted in Chapter 1 Network Failure iNEWS and FTS Connectivity ftsdebug Command Chapter 7 Troubleshooting INEWS Workstation Problems This section explains common problems users may have during daily operation Possible solutions appear after each problem A user who installs the client software iNEWS Workstation on a computer running a Windows based operating system must have permission to overwrite system files necessary to run the product as in MFC42 DLL Log in as administrator and set privileges on user accounts to enable access and modification rights on the system32 directory A User Cannot Log in If a user is unable to log in to the NEWS Workstation and gets the Invalid User Name Password error message ensure the user Entered correct user name and password spelled correctly Specified proper server name Use the list u console command to verify a user with that name exists on the system If the password is a problem assign the user a new password Then force a password change to maintain security See Chapter 3 for more information A User Cannot Establish a Session 96 If the user is properly entering user name password and server name but the login attempt hangs and then begins to cycle through alternate server names wait until the login attempt times out and follow these steps 1 Try to ping the server to check network connection to the server
164. edure you want to incorporate into the dialog This way steps in that procedure are captured to a story that you can refer to while designing the dialog each line in the dialog is built as a line of the story This process includes the most commonly used dialog commands To build a dialog 1 Create a dialog queue Each dialog must be in a separate queue in the SYSTEM DIALOG directory The first step in creating a new dialog is to go to SYSTEM DIALOG and create a queue to hold it The name you give this queue is also the name of the dialog so choose a queue name that describes what the dialog does such as Console for a dialog used Network Services during connect sessions to the console See the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual for more information about adding new directories queues or stories Open a new story in the queue and build the dialog Type a message that will be displayed on the user s workstation indicating the connection is being established using the following format message lt text gt The message dialog command displays on the user s screen whatever text you put in the lt text gt parameter Type wait CONNECT When you use a modem to make the connection you want the dialog to wait until the modem sends the word CONNECT to the workstation signaling it has made the connection If necessary use these additional commands to accommodate the login
165. efly take your system offline preventing users from logging in The day before performing the monthly database cleanup offline do the following 1 Select the master computer typically server A 2 Type dbserver 16000000 to empty the Dead queue For more details on the procedure for shutting down the system see Chapter 3 of the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual A Maintaining the Database Starting the day before allows time for the system to complete this process which may take several hours before you run dbvisit To check the database structure for errors dovisit must perform a cursory check of stories in the database including those in the Dead queue You can shorten the time it takes dbvisit to examine the database by using dbserver to empty the Dead queue first The dbserver command initiates a day long operation and should be done one day ahead of the next steps in this procedure Your system remains online during the operation After the dbserver operation is completed you are ready to clean up the database offline by doing the following 1 Shutdown the system by completing the following steps a Select all servers b Take the system offline c Log out all users The dbvisit command cannot examine stories being edited You must log out everyone on the system and stop all news programs on the servers before running dbvisit d Run stop all on all servers to stop all PCU
166. ems Dumped on a Particular Date To list items dumped on a particular date 1 Use the following format of dbrestore dbrestore td d lt date gt 2 Enter the date in YYMMDD year month day or YYYYMMDD format Restoring Data to the INEWS Database Begin single digit months and days with a zero such as 04 for April Also check for items dumped to tape during a month by using the year and the month YYMM You can check to see what was dumped to a tape during a year by specifying just the year YY For instance to list everything dumped in October 2000 type dbrestore td d 0010 A message similar to the following appears Listing tape contents only Type Stories Name Dir Dir SHOW TODAY Que 34 SHOW TODAY SCRIPTS Que 3 SHOW TODAY RUNDOWNS Continuing with Dump 2 Block 0 Dumped Thu Jul15 10 30 19 2004 Dir SHOW TODAY Que 27 SHOW TODAY SCRIPTS Que 3 SHOW TODAY RUNDOWNS 67 stories listed In the previous example the tape contains only backups from two dates the first backup and one made on July 15 2004 Notice the date of the first backup is not included in the listing To find the date of the first backup use the dbrestore tf command described below The dbrestore displays a Continuing with Dump message just before processing the second dump Listing the Date of Each Backup To list the dates of each backup on a tape type dbrestore tf 67 Chapter 5 Backing Up the iN
167. en order 166 on lt day gt Indicates on which days of the week a time interval task will occur You can combine this instruction with the at keyword to indicate both day and time Applies to action and tx servers open lt computer gt lt username gt lt format gt lt queue name gt lt story name gt Initiates a network connection to a remote system for story transfer The username you specify must exist with identical passwords on both the local and remote systems Applies to tx servers The lt computer gt can include a port number The format is host port Ifno port is included in the lt computer gt parameter the port defined by the rxnet service is used if defined otherwise the port defined by the FTP service is used The lt username gt can specify a simple name or a name in the format name host Only the name portion is used to locally look up a password The entire username is sent in the FTP USER command This may allow connections to be made through proxy servers The format if specified must be one of the following 2nsml nsm1 sep or html The queue name and story name are only used when the format is set to HTML The queue name and story name are used to get the Web publishing template that controls the formatting of the story into an HTML page If the queue name is not specified the template is taken from the SYSTEM WEBFORMS queue The story name can be used to select a specific template from
168. ening stories have them in edit lock mode This is the logical setting for any queue in which people will be changing stories Turn Read Access on for queues in which people are likely to read but not change the stories Printable SRP1o LISUGQSXWFiT p p Database Traits Console Command Summary Indicates whether you can use the print command on all stories in the queue with a single command when systen printing To enable users to print all stories in the SHOW 5PM SCRIPTS queue with a single command dbtraits show 5pm scripts p This trait does not interfere with your use ofthe print story or print script commands on individual stories in the queue 313 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console 314 Name Queue Being Ordered Locked Queue Location in Display SRPlo LIsSUGQSXWFiT Keyword SRP1lo LISUGQSXWFiT o SRP1o LISUGQSXWFiT Mode Option Definition Example This is an indicator rather than database traits It indicates the queue s order status 1 indicates that the queue is currently order locked to prevent more than one user from reordering stories in a queue at the same time To find out who is ordering a queue read the Busy error message you get when you try to order the queue If no one is actually ordering the queue then it has an invalid order lock on it o indicates the queue was once sorted but has since been ordered When a sorted queue is ordered the system
169. er mapping feature allows a single character to be mapped to one or two characters 63 Chapter 5 Backing Up the iNEWS System See dbrestore Character Map Arabic on page 268 for more information Map definitions come in three forms 65 gt 97 a single to single map 65 90 gt 97 122 a range of single to single maps 247 gt 225 194 a single to two character map Notice that the difference of mapping to a single versus a double is an equal sign instead of a dash Restoring a First Level Directory 64 Restoring a first level directory such as Scripts as opposed to SCRIPTS FEB is the same as restoring queues and other directories However when restoring such a directory you also have the option of restoring it under a new name Use dbrestore d n lt olddir name gt lt newdir name gt If the new directory does not already exist dbrestore creates it For instance suppose you have a directory called Scripts and you want to restore a previous backup of this directory to another directory called Scripts temp which does not exist Type dbrestore d n scripts scripts temp A message similar to the following appears 744 stories restored Since Scripts temp does not exist dbrestore creates it before restoring Scripts temp When dbrestore has restored all stories in Scripts temp it displays a message indicating how many stories were restored If you want to restore a sp
170. er with the computer command The command may be abbreviated typing z or zoom plus the computer name will work For commands that include an individual server letter A B C or D use the pound character to send to multiple servers without typing them individually The console will convert the to the server s letter such as A or B For instance if you type connect the console sends the command connect Atoserver A connect B to server B and so forth To enter a without it converting to a server letter press the Enter key on the numeric keypad then press Shift 3 Console Server Commands broadcast configure 120 You must enter commands in lowercase Your system does not recognize commands entered in uppercase broadcast lt message gt Sends a message to everyone logged in The d option will issue the broadcast in a popup window For instance to send a message select one server and type NRCS AS broadcast d System going down at 12 00 Certain characters are interpretted by the bash shell program so when including characters such as angled brackets exclamation points asterisks or pound signs lt gt in the lt message the entire message should be placed within quotation marks to prevent the program from interpretting them configure ns lt config file gt lt system gt lt computers gt Incorporates changes to your configuration file into your system s operation and checks the
171. erations the system constantly locks and unlocks blocks on the hard drive as data is accessed Occasionally something may go wrong and a locked block is left behind If you have a persistently locked block any other process that tries to access the locked block will wait for the block to become available The usual scenario for this problem is that PCs start hanging in the newsroom when users get to a story in a rundown that is in a locked block Users then move to another PC and hang that one too when they access the locked block story If the original locked block is unlocked then all frozen PCs unhang How to Check Process Status ps Command To check for a locked block type the dblock command on all servers Type dblock several times in succession and note the block numbers reported If block numbers are changing then the process is not hung up on a locked block If the block number and process ID number remain the same through successive dblock commands then it may be a locked block situation If a block remains locked for more than one minute the system sill print a diagnostic on the console and will repeat the message every minute the block remains locked The system will remove block locks owned by processes that have exited If you have a persistently locked block contact Avid Customer Support How to Check Process Status ps Command Occasionally the support staff may ask you to run a few Linux commands to trouble
172. ercase counterparts and vice versa 147 Appendix A Command References 148 Use the makeshift command in maintenance mode when you install iNEWS to implement the case shifting dictionary appropriate for the national language used at your site makeshift Command Options Vv r lt shift file gt lt filel gt lt file2 gt path Verbose To diagnose the case shifting dictionary for potential errors displaying messages for each line in the file Checks that the file is readable and contains shift tables Install To install the shift table into files you specify in the filename list Ask To confirm installation of each file as you are installing the shift tables Forces installation Print To print shift tables contained in each file you specify in the filename list with formatting similar to that in the default case shifting dictionary This option does not build or install the shift tables File Specify with a lt shift file gt filename to use a file other than the default file for the case shifting dictionary The default file is site dict shift Recursive For directories When you specify the f option enter the case shifting dictionary name you want to use instead of the site dict shift file When you specify the i or p option enter one or more file names to install or print If you specify a directory path instead of a file name the makeshift program processes each file in the dir
173. ere the next occurrence of the word appears In each case the current line becomes the line number displayed by ed Searching Tips Here are a few more tips for searching with ed Launching ed e Remember to use spaces before and or after text to further define your search string For instance type 25 insteadof 25 to avoid finding other numbers that contain the number 25 such as in the line net n125 20 e Remember that searches are case sensitive For instance searching for PCU does not find pcu e Remember that searches distinguish between spaces and tabs In other words if you use spaces and the file contains the information separated by a tab you will not find it For instance the search example below will not work You type pcu 20 pcu and 20 are separated by a space The line is peu 20 pcu and 20 are separated by a tab Editing Commands There are several basic editing commands you can use in ed to view change add move and delete text in a system file Some commands such as Add Delete and Insert change the current line while others do not For instance the Print command sets the current line to the number of the last line printed 337 Appendix H_ The Line Editor ed Command a 338 Here is a list of editing commands along with examples of their use Description amp Examples The Append command inserts one or more lines after the selected line For instance websession
174. ers contained in each free list block In this example 769 blocks are used to hold the 224 159 free block numbers That is an average of 291 free block numbers per free list block 2 Back up old material to tape and remove it from the database 3 Check and reset purge intervals of Wires directories and queues To view purge intervals at the console type list d wires Information similar to the following appears SRP1lo LISUG QSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory D R I Q XW TITLE P4 0 D1 WIRES DeReeese I Q XW TITLE P4 0 D1 WIRES ALL D R I Q XW TITLE P4 0 D1 WIRES AP One of the biggest consumers of database space in a newsroom is the Wires directory Because wire stories lose much of their value after a few days most newsrooms set a purge interval of 2 or 3 days In this example all Wires directories and queues have a purge interval of four days The purge interval is a database trait you can customize for each database directory or queue For more information on modifying database traits including purge intervals see Chapter 5 of the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual 47 Chapter 4 Database Management Maintaining the Database The following sections describe the two most important maintenance procedures you should perform regularly on your database e Check the database for errors e Clean up the database on a monthly basis Checking the Dat
175. ervice you want If it works then the necessary programs are installed If you cannot find the service or one does not work call Avid Customer Support for help 2 Choose a device number for the resource and a name for the service In the following examples the service name is console Check your configuration file site config to determine the appropriate device number for your new resource For a network resource choose a number in the range you have reserved for services servers and similar devices Ensure the number you choose is out of the range used for normal devices 23 Chapter 2 Connect Services See the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual for more information on selecting servers and the Site Configuration file The following steps use ed to modify system files If you are unfamiliar with this line editor see Appendix H 24 3 Add the resource to the configuration file on each server in your sys tem Add the device number of the network resource to the reslist line in the server s host definition To keep the network resource available if you bring down one of the system servers add this line to any appropriate alternate host definitions a Select all servers b Use ed line editor to open the configuration file The display will look similar to NRCS AS ed site config 1356 The general format for a network resource configuration line is resource lt de
176. es originally numbered 27 and 31 prior to the first Delete command Command g Launching ed Description amp Examples Continued The Global command allows the user to apply an editing command to all lines in the file that contain a specific word phrase or number For instance g asws s asws inws Finds all occurrences of asws and uses the Substitute command to replace the first occurrence of asws on each line found with inws To replace all occurences on a line add g to the end of the command such as g asws s asws inws g g websession d Finds all occurrences of websession and deletes the lines containing it Each line affected is displayed after the editing command is applied The Insert command inserts one or more lines before the selected line For instance websession websession 900 i inws 511 1 gnews inws In the above example the user searches for websession and ed responds by displaying the first line found containing that word The user types i and presses Enter to start the insert operation The user then types two lines of information to be inserted in the file before the displayed line On the last line the user types a period on a line by itself which is very important because it terminates the insert operation Without it successive lines typed by the user would be added to the file The Move command removes the line s specified from their original location and inserts the line
177. et Avid supports open integration by among other methods offering no fewer than 13 Applications Programming Interfaces APIs for Avid products to interact with third party devices software and custom development such as the general NRCS MOS protocol agreement or Transfer Manager APIs The iNEWS system is capable of interfacing with a wide variety of major control systems and servers with dedicated device interfaces including Omnibus and Sony The iNEWS system has an efficient Active X implementation of the MOS protocol which greatly extends its interfacing abilities For instance in conjunction with iNEWS ControlAir provides a System Administrator Tasks central point of control for up to 32 production devices such as video servers character generators and still store machines from third party manufacturers a sample of which is provided in Table 1 Table 1 Third Party Integration Device Type Manufacturers Video Servers Sony Grass Valley and Quantel Character Generators Chyron Aston Pinnacle Abekas Quantel and Pixel Power Still Store Machines Leitch and Quantel The Avid Unity Transfer Manager productivity tool synchronizes with the iNEWS rundown to determine file transfer priority the story that appears sooner in the rundown will automatically be ranked higher in the queue and playout order of the newscast matches the rundown precisely In addition to conforming to accepted standard file formats such
178. etrieval The LIST and NLST commands produce the identical output a directory listing The NLST command produces a name list that is a list of subdirectories in the directory and a list of stories id s in a queue The iNEWS FTP Server produces a list of names without story attributes If you want the iNEWS Server to include story attributes put RKOLDNLST 1 in the rxnet environment If you do not want story attributes included use RXOLDNLST 0 The bold entires are exactly what to place in the file Do not use an export statement after the line Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console Chapter 4 in the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual explains how the system administrator can access and change the various user traits associated with each user s account from an iNEWS Workstation In that same book Chapter 5 explains how to manage database traits from a workstation and Chapter 6 explains how to create groups and apply the system s group related features to customize the system s security and usage from a workstation This Appendix shows how some of the information also can be viewed and modified from the console This appendix contains the following main sections e Viewing User Traits from the Console e Modifying User Traits from the Console User Traits Console Command Summary e Changing Database Traits from the Console Database Traits Console Command Summary e Managing Group Traits at
179. etup and Configuration Manual is a comprehensive resource of all the information you will need to take advantage of the many options available to you This manual will lead you through even the most complex procedures with task oriented instructions The information provided here builds on basic news production procedures described in the help system and other user based guides while adding a complete explanation of all the tools and techniques required to manage the newsroom computer system including useful tips shortcuts and custom options The Contents lists all topics included in this guide They are presented with the following overall structure The Introduction helps you get oriented with beginning concepts and general workflow and provides valuable pointers to keep in mind as you proceed e The main body of this guide follows the natural flow of your work with clear and comprehensive step by step procedures e Finally a detailed Index helps you quickly locate specific topics Symbols and Conventions Symbols and Conventions Avid documentation uses the following symbols and conventions Symbol or Convention Meaning or Action A Margin tips Italic font Courier Bold font A note provides important related information reminders recommendations and strong suggestions A caution means that a specific action you take could cause harm to your computer or cause you to lose data A warning describes an action
180. eues in the database that have a particular abstract printer value use list ap lt printer number gt qd Abstract Lines The abstract lines trait controls whether or not abstracting is done and if it is done how many lines of each story are printed Both ap and al must be non zero for abstract printing to be enabled To set this trait use dbtraits lt queue name gt al lt abstract lines value gt For instance to set WIRES STATE to print 10 line abstracts type dbtraits wires states al 10 325 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console Mailbox 326 If you do not want the queue to be an abstract printing queue set this trait to zero Otherwise set this trait to the number of lines you want printed for each story You can select a number of lines between 1 and 125 A value of 126 prints the entire story in script form Setting abstract lines to 127 prints the entire story in story form Zero is the default value for this trait which means the queue is not set up to print abstracts The format of the abstract lines information is SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT sortfield ap al as dis directory Q TITLE A000 000 000 D1 WIRES STATE Abstract Style The abstract style trait indicates the print style your system uses when it prints an abstract from this queue To choose a style set this trait to the number representing the style you want To list all queues in the database that have a particular abstract style
181. exed Documents 1458 Requests Serviced 39 The number of requests serviced includes index requests purge requests and ftsdebug status requests so it is unlikely to match the number of indexed documents If communication with the FTS utility programs on the FTS server is unavailable the t sdebug command will hang and then eventually time out and respond with a message that it could connect If this happens check the Windows based FTS server to see whether it rebooted Also confirm whether the utility programs tsidx exe and ftssch exe are running Stop and restart them then check for communication again If the tsdebug command hangs you can break out of it by pressing the Control and C keys Ctrl C 111 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 112 Appendix A Command References Most of your system s commands are special commands provided by Avid The commands you are most likely to need are listed and explained in this appendix along with examples Some available commands are meant to be used only by Avid technicians or under the supervision of Avid personnel These commands may cause damage if used improperly They are listed in this appendix on page 114 This appendix contains the following main sections Programs Invoked by iNEWS Commands Used by Avid Personnel Only Linux Commands Used in iNEWS Console Control Commands Console Server Commands Job List Commands Dialog Commands Appendix A Command References
182. flow the Avid iINEWS newsroom computer system provides up to date news data throughout the newsroom and seamlessly links all tasks in the production process such as wire service assignment desk script writing browse editing rundown playout and device control tasks The Avid Unity for News environment consists of integration between several Avid products such as The Avid iNEWS newsroom computer system The Avid Media Browse system including Avid Capture Manager e The Avid iNEWS ControlAir system The Avid NewsCutter nonlinear editing system e Avid Active ContentManager e Avid AirSPACE video server s Your newsroom may have any one or all of these products and others not mentioned in this brief summary 10 What is Avid Unity for NEWS The figure below shows a typical high and low resolution workflow from capture to playout in a shared storage environment with an iNEWS newsroom computer system High Resolution Edit amp Finish Avid News Cutter System iNEWS Newsroom Computer System d Dual Capture B Newsroom B Rundown Control fini i Avid INEWS Control Air i HiRes Avid AirSPACE A Canney eo e Media Control Avid Avid Xdeck z Finished Avid AirSPACE Avid Unity Saqienee for News d Auto Conform D Play To Air Avid Capture Manager Lo Res A Media MPEG 1 Encoder Media Browse Workstations Media Br
183. for Abstract Printer This trait indicates which printer your system uses to automatically print abstracts for this queue The al that follows ap stands for Abstract Lines This trait controls whether or not abstracting is done and if it is done how many lines of each story are printed Changing Database Traits from the Console Changing Database Traits from the Console To change a database trait from the console you must use the dbtraits command The general format is dbtraits pathname only option value mode mode Database traits come in two types options and modes e Options accept a range of values such as setting 18 hours for a queue s purge interval dbtraits rundowns 5pm purge 18 e Modes are traits that are either assigned or not that is they are either turned on or off A trait preceded by a plus turns a mode on A trait preceded by a minus turns it off The following is an example dbtraits rundowns 5pm p You can change several traits at the same time For instance the following command changes the queue to read only status and also assigns the wires story form and the wires queue panel form to it dbtraits wires r sform wires qform wires Changing a Parent Directory Only When you change a directory s traits at the console dbtraits also applies your changes to any subdirectories or queues in that folder You can restrict your changes to the parent directory by following th
184. for B NRCS A offline NRCS A configure NRCS A online Wait for the system being configured messages to appear on both servers before moving on to the next step Step 13 Start up the revived server When you run startup on the revived server the devices and utility programs such as action servers or txnet links on that server are started and it is placed online NRCS B startup Step 14 Put the master computer back online The system is now running normally with A processes and devices running on server A and B processes and devices running on server B The diskcopy command will continue to run in the background working to mirror the entire database The diskcopy process will send progress messages to the console screen and eventually report that the diskcopy is complete You can check whether it has completed by running the status command The disk status will be UNKNOWN until diskcopy completes at that time it changes to OK Step 15 If you used the alternate method 2 in step 10 and typed logout all and stop all If you decided to log out all users and stop all devices in step 10 you should restart all of the survivor s devices by typing restart all on the master computer The system is now running normally dual with all sessions and devices in their normal places The diskcopy may still be running in the background copying the database back to the failed server Disconnect Recovery If server B was selected as
185. fore allowing users to re enter the queue Starting the Queue Sort Function from the Console You can use the console to restore a ordered queue to its original sorted state and restart sorting in one of two ways e Use the dbsort command e Usethe dbtraits o command Purge Interval Database Traits Console Command Summary To restart sorting at a queue using the dbsort command 1 Type the dbsort command and the queue name you want to sort For instance dbsort rundowns 5pm 2 Press Enter Something similar to the following appears Sorting lt RUNDOWNS 5PM gt If the queue has a write group assigned to it you must be a console superuser to use dbsort Otherwise you will see something like this RUNDOWNS 5PM Write group producers NOT sorted To restart sorting at a queue using the dbtraits o command 1 Type the dbtraits command the queue name you want to sort and o For instance dbtraits rundowns 5pm o 2 Press Enter Using either the dbsort or the dbtraits command turns off the ordered attribute allowing the queue to resume sorting as indicated by the sort trait The format of the purge information is SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory Q RP I QSXW TITLE P3 0 D1 WIRES ALL The purge column inthe list d output displays the directory or queue s purge interval preceded by P The purge interval determines how old stories in a queue can get before they are purged Every hour y
186. form Example dbtraits show 6pm rundown sform rundown new cform For this to take effect you need to log out and log back in again Strip Form stripform Removes embedded form display information from stories Forms allowed queues stamp the look of the story form into the story Assigning a different story form to one of these queues and running changeform on the queue would not affect the look of stories with embedded forms You would need to strip the embedded look out of the story so it would then appear using the form assigned to that queue Mailbox mbox mail Indicates mailbox assigned to the queue See Mailbox on page 326 for more information 320 Name Groups Text Timing Clocks Sortfield Location in Display SRPlo LIsSUGQSXWFiT Keyword wg rg ng wel rg ng SRP1lo LISUGQSXWFiT t t Mode Option Database Traits Console Command Summary Definition Example Assigns a write read or notify group to queue or directory Here are a few examples dbtraits show 5pm rg castread dbtraits show 5pm wg producers See Managing Group Traits at the Console on page 329 for more information See Groups on page 329 for more information Turns on the Text Timing Clocks which appear in the Story Text panel They are TTC Time to cursor BLK Time of blocked highlighted text EST Estimated read time of entire story To turn on these clocks in the RUN DOWN 5PM
187. ges select the master computer typically server A and type y In addition to spotting errors in the database structure dbvisit collects any unreferenced blocks and puts them on the free list Unreferenced blocks are not used by any story and are not a part of the free list They are stray blocks that cannot be used until they are put on the free list 6 Restart your system by doing the following a Select all servers b Exit superuser mode by pressing Ctrl D c Type online to bring the system back online d Type restart all to restart all devices The system displays Hot to go messages as the devices start If a PCU or device cannot be started a failed message is displayed for that PCU or device Wait for the other devices to start then use standard procedures to restart failed devices as covered in the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual 53 Chapter 4 Database Management 54 Chapter 5 Backing Up the iNEWS System To properly maintain the iNEWS system you need to perform three kinds of backups Database backups of the iNEWS database Software backups of iNEWS software and the operating system e System file backups of files like site config and etc hosts This chapter explains the procedures for the various types of backups required to properly maintain the iNEWS system It also provides general information about using tapes and tape drives This chapter contains the follo
188. has two parts e The first part labeled with the keyword tolower maps decimal values of uppercase characters to the decimal values of their lowercase counterparts The second part labeled with the keyword toupper maps decimal values of lowercase characters to decimal values of their uppercase counterparts In the default dictionary shipped with INEWS newsroom computer system a character at a decimal position in the range on the left of the arrow gt shifts to the character at the corresponding decimal position in the range on Case shifting Dictionary site dict shift the right For instance the character at decimal position 65 A is mapped to the character at decimal position 97 a the character at decimal position 66 B shifts to the character at decimal position 98 b and so on tolower 65 90 gt 97 122 A Z gt a z 192 207 gt 224 239 209 221 gt 241 253 end toupper 97 122 gt 65 90 Par Boss ASG 224 239 gt 192 207 241 253 gt 209 221 end The character conversion table the system uses depends on the interface you are using Ifyou are using the DOS the character conversion table is based on the DEC Multinational Character Set MCS e Ifyou are using the iNEWS Graphic User Interface GUI the conversion table is based on the ISO standard for multinational characters If character mappings specified in these standard character conversion tables are not app
189. he file or your system will not run properly Select all servers before launching ed and opening a file for editing to ensure changes you make are applied to each server s copy of the file To launch ed from the console gt Type ed followed by the file path and name to be edited For instance to edit a copy of the configuration file in the Site directory you would type NRCS A ed site config test 3624 The line editor ed returns a number indicating the file size expressed as the number of characters including spaces and returns Also the console prompt NRCS A changes to no prompt when you launch the editor If the file name specified does not exist or is a non text file unsuitable for editing with ed ed returns a question mark followed by the file name This is one way to create a new text file For instance a new text file called newfile is created when the following is typed NRCS A ed newfile newfile Do not attempt to edit a non text file such as a binary file Doing so could cause undesirable results Specifying Lines to Edit The line you are on presently is called the current line 334 Because ed is a line editor you navigate through the file by line numbers For instance when you open a file for editing ed considers the last line in the file the current line If you want to view or edit a different line you must go to that line For instance you can move to the first line of the file by typi
190. he final list of groups and their members gtraits add lt group name gt This command creates groups ofusers and modifies the security of existing groups 137 Appendix A Command References help hogs 138 The following lines show syntax for the gtraits command gtraits changegroup lt pathname gt gtraits delete lt group name gt gtraits interactive gtraits list gtraits list lt group name gt lt user name gt gtraits rename lt old group name gt lt new group name gt gtraits transfer lt source group name gt lt destination group name gt The first letter of each option can be used for shorthand help lt command name gt Displays information on how to use other commands For instance to get instructions for the 1ist command type help list A message similar to the following appears usage list configuration lt termid gt lt name gt list directory lt name gt lt name gt list terminal lt termid gt lt name gt list user list queue lt name gt lt record limit gt hogs lt pathname gt Scans the directories or queues you specify and displays usage information for them You can use this command to get an idea of which queues are consuming the most space and how much is being consumed This command is most useful when used on the People directory For instance to display usage information for the People directory type hogs
191. he time frame to search 6 Click OK to confirm your advanced search setting or click Cancel to cancel it 7 Click Search to initiate the search A progress bar appears if a lengthy search is underway Results of the search appear in the User List field in the center of the Manage User Accounts dialog box As a system administrator you can change a user s password Change a user s password to provide a new user with a temporary password or to supply an established user with a new password if the user forgets it and cannot log in See the iINEWS Newsroom 33 Chapter 3 Database Security Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual for more information on how to do this from any iNEWS Workstation For steps on how to change a user s password from the console using the utraits console command see Changing a Users Password on page 298 Forcing Individual Users to Change Their Passwords Occasionally you may have individual users who do not change their passwords as required When that happens you can force them to change their password at their next login You can do this for a single user at an iNEWS Workstation To force multiple users to change their passwords such as all users who haven t changed their passwords in the past six months you must go to the console For steps on how to force password changes from the console see Changing a Users Password on page 298 At an iNEWS Workstation
192. heir personal queues If you copy and distribute enough stories a large portion of the database can become cluttered with the copies To avoid filling up the disk with copies of stories your system keeps only the original story on the disk When a story is copied to another queue your system puts a reference to the original story in the queue that will hold the copy When someone opens a copy of a story the system uses the reference to find the original story It makes a working copy of that story which it sends to the user If the user examines the working copy and makes no changes the working copy is deleted when the user closes the story However if the user makes changes to the working copy and saves it the system saves that copy as a story replacing the reference In most cases you can treat a reference to an actual story as if it were the story The only time you need to take references into consideration is when setting purge intervals When the system references a story to several different queues each reference takes on the purge interval of the queue When a reference becomes older than its queue s purge interval the computer puts the reference not the actual story in the Dead queue The space used for a story becomes free only when the last reference to the story has been removed from the system Tracking Database Space over Time 44 Do not wait until you encounter an out of space condition before you star
193. i umlaut i circumflex O circumflex u circumflex u grave arabic comma left double angle quote right double angle quote arabic semi colon tah zah ain ghain tatweel feh qaf kaf jlam jmeem noon heh waw jalef maksura yeh fathatan dammatan kasratan fatha damma kasra shadda sukun arabic comma lam alef with madda above lam alef with hamza above lam alef with hamza below lam alef Sample Arabic Wire Profile Sample Arabic Wire Profile The following is an example of a wire profile for an Arabic wire service using the map and reverse wire profile options wire alae 300 5 dummy MIN MINA service cat site wires 11 MENA WIRE iNEWS 1 2 MS Codepage 1256 form wire arabic bits 5 flags pblines start lt 212 gt lt 237 gt lt 212 gt lt 237 gt lt 128 gt lt LF gt lt 128 gt lt LF gt lt 128 gt lt LF gt lt 128 gt lt LF gt lt 128 gt lt LF gt lt 128 gt lt LF gt reverse 0123456789 end lt 228 gt lt 228 gt lt 228 gt slug 30 accent lt bs gt form wire flags addheol map lt 00 gt _ lt bs gt map lt 01 gt lt 216 gt map lt 02 gt lt CR gt lt LF gt map lt 03 gt lt 213 gt 4 is space map lt 05 gt lt 198 gt map lt 06 gt lt 200 gt map lt 07 gt lt 203 gt map lt 08 gt lt 223 gt map lt 09 gt lt 222 gt map lt 10 gt lt 207 gt map lt 11 gt lt 229 gt map lt 12 gt lt 228 gt map lt 13 gt lt 221 gt map lt 14 gt lt 23
194. ickly click and release the right mouse button Drag Click and hold the left mouse button while you move the mouse Ctrl key Press and hold the first key such as Ctrl Alt or Shift while you press the second key If You Need Help If you are having trouble using iNEWS 1 Retry the action carefully following the instructions given for that task in this guide It is especially important to check each step of your workflow 2 Check for the latest information that might have become available after the documentation was published in one of two locations Ifrelease notes are available they ship with your application CD are in PDF format and may be viewed from the CD using Adobe Reader a program freely available on the Internet IfReadMe files are available they are supplied in your Avid application folder ReadMe files are also available from Help Release notes and ReadMe files are also available on the Avid Knowledge Center If You Need Help 3 Check the documentation that came with your Avid application or your hardware for maintenance or hardware related issues 4 Visit the Knowledge Center at www avid com support Online support services are available 24 hours per day 7 days per week Search this online Knowledge Center to find answers to view error messages to access troubleshooting tips to download updates and to read join online message board discussions 5 For Technical Support please call 800 800
195. ilure 106 If you experience a power failure the servers will reboot After they work their way back to the login prompt and you have logged in the servers will not be named they will be at the question mark colon prompt 28 If both servers went down at the same time the databases will still be in mirror and they can be connected normally and started up 1 On all servers simultaneously type connect 2 To remove edit locks on the master computer only type dbclean x This command is not strictly necessary Stale edit locks are detected and ignored An edit lock is considered to be stale if the session that owns the lock no longer exists or if the session was started logged in after the edit lock was acquired 3 On all servers simultaneously type startup Network Failure If they are plugged into different UPSs and they ran through the UPS battery and then lost power and rebooted you will not know if they went down concurrently One UPS may have run longer than another If so more stories may have flowed in on a wire or been saved by a user while the one server was still up and the other was down The database will not be in mirror and you will need to go through the recovery process as noted in Chapter 1 Network Failure The iNEWS newsroom computer system is a networked client server application A well running Ethernet network is essential for proper communication between the devices A netwo
196. in your system s configuration file Reconfigure the system so it recognizes any changes you make to your system s devices Setup printer styles so that different tasks can be printed in pre designated formats Setup servers which are utility programs that automatically perform various actions on the stories in your database Change wire distribution and sorting of data coming into your database from a wire service to queues based on their category codes or content Write dialogs lists of instructions for each service to automate the connection process A service is a device that connects a user to a remote computer system System Administrator Tasks Reviewing Default Settings Your responsibilities regarding system profiles default settings and command syntax include e Troubleshooting Changing a system profile setting to change your system s operation Reviewing default settings of all system profile parameters Reviewing command syntax for edit console and job list commands Your troubleshooting responsibilities include Transfer system activities from a halted computer to other system computers If a computer connected to the system has been halted bring the system back to operation using the remaining computers Reconnect a computer that has been halted Following routine maintenance reintegrate a computer into your system s operation 17 Chapter 1 18 Introduction Chapter 2 Connect
197. ines are no longer mirrored The only recourse is to choose one of the servers databases to become the master database The database on the other server is wiped clean and then recopied from the master server Users logged on to the failed server B are creating stories on a database that is going to be wiped clean That information will be lost unless stories created after the disconnect are first exported to the local hard drive so they can be imported to the survivor once the user logs in to the other server The following are steps necessary to recover the system Step 1 Choose one master machine to continue working with survivor It does not matter whether you choose server A or B as your master computer What is important is to choose one quickly You may choose one server over the other if it has more users logged in on it Or you may choose the server that has the show producer logged in on it If you are about to enter a show you may pick the one that runs the teleprompter Or you may choose A as the survivor so the steps exactly shadow instructions in this section For more information on superuser mode selecting servers and configuring the system see the iINEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual Disconnect Recovery Step 2 Reconfigure the master computer survivor When you run the configure command the master computer looks at the current system configuration and then consults the approp
198. ing The workserver process runs on iINEWS Servers that manage the connection between PCs and servers The workdebug stat command queries the workserver to obtain a list of how many sessions are configured and how many are currently logged in NRCS A workdebug stat workserver configured GUI general count A 19B0C0OD0 workserver running GUI general count AO BOCODQO etc If workdebug stat does not return a response at the console this may indicate the workserver process has either died or entered a non responsive state The workserver process may need to be killed and restarted Contact Avid Customer Support for further instructions If you get a response from workdebug stat you can put work server into a diagnostic mode where it will display messages on the screen when PC clients attempt to establish a connection To do this select all servers and type NRCS AS workdebug debug The message returned when the workstation attempts to log in may give you a clue as to the problem If no messages appear when the workstation tries to log in then the workstation is not reaching the server Use the workdebug command again to turn off debugging mode and stop the diagnostic messaging by typing NRCS AS workdebug silent A User Cannot Access an Item If a user cannot read or write stories in part of the database he or she may not have permission to do so Check the user s group permissions 98 Group Permissions Bu
199. ions computer lt name gt mailbox lt number gt or lt name gt list lt option gt d a f g o s u v lt directory name gt list d Command Options d a Abstract printing traits d f Queue and story form names d g Group information d o Order user list g list q Console Server Commands d s Son count and sequence number d u Lock user d v Verbose mode Lists information about the specified directory or queue If no directory or queue name follows d the command displays information on the entire database For instance list d dead SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory QR sess I G X TITLE P3 0 Dl DEAD list d f dead SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT queue form story form directory Q R I G X DEAD list d v dead SRPlo LIsSUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge ap al as dis mbox Q R I G X TITLE P3 0 A000 000 000 DI rg wg ng queue form story form list g kuser or group name gt Lists group information list lt option gt q a b dJ f J gqJ mJ s v lt name gt lt limit gt list q Command Options q a Record address q b Reverse order q d Include deleted entries q f Story form q g Read and write group information 143 Appendix A Command References list s list u 144 q m Who moved duplicated or killed the queue q s Queue stamp q v Verbose output Lists information on the contents of a queue For instance
200. is queue in the Directory panel or open this queue You may copy or move stories containing suggestions to this queue Removing Directory or Queue Restrictions 332 To remove a directory or queue s read or write restrictions at the console you first must log on as a console superuser that is the prompt should appear with a number sign not a colon To remove a restriction type dbtraits followed by the name of the directory or queue you want to change then rg wg ng and a dash For instance to remove both the read and write restrictions from the Phonelists queue As a console superuser type NRCS A dbtraits phonelists rg wg To apply these read and write group changes to stories already in the Phonelists queue as a superuser type NRCS A gtraits changegroup phonelists Now anyone can read and write stories in the Phonelists queue Appendix H The Line Editor ed This appendix provides basic information about the line editor called ed including procedures for using it to make changes to important system files These include the system configuration system profile and printer or wire profile files Additional information may be obtained by typeing info ed at the console This appendix contains e Launching ed e Editing Commands e Saving Changes e Quitting ed Appendix H The Line Editor ed Launching ed A When you modify a file make the same changes to each server s copy of t
201. isplays the text specified in st ring and closes the connect session To use timer follow it with the number of seconds you want it to count and the string you want it to display if that period of time elapses For instance you may want to use the timer command so it terminates the session if the dialog is unable to log in within 60 seconds When a pass command is active an active timer command suspends counting When pass command finishes timer command resumes counting Also the same timer command applies to any subsequent wait commands if no other timer commands appear before them If you do not want to use the same timer value for another wait command later in the dialog insert timer 0 after the first wait command This cancels the first timer command and causes subsequent wait commands to wait for their string forever if no other timer commands follow timer 0 type lt string to send gt Sends a string to the device to which the service has connected For instance if you were creating a dialog that types the user s name in response to a login prompt you may use type joel smith 175 Appendix A Command References wait 176 Most devices to which you connect expect a carriage return represented by a lt cr gt after each string you send When this is the case you must include a lt cr gt at the end of the string wait lt string to wait for gt Pauses the dialog until a specified string is received from a device
202. l be running all devices in the system It is not necessary to restart the failed server s utility programs because they are automatically started on the survivor when the disconnect is detected Step 6 Log in to the rebooted failed server as system operator then become superuser At the login prompt log in as the system operator user so iNEWS Newsroom Computer System login so Password Last login Mon Jul 19 07 17 23 on ttyS0 ae When you log back in you will be at the question mark prompt because the server is not yet named connected You must be in superuser mode for the next step su Password Disconnect Recovery Step 7 Wipe clean the disconnected failed server s database Select the failed disconnected server on the console and use the diskclear command to wipe the database off the failed server The display will look similar to the following with what you type appearing in bold diskclear DANGER This program DESTROYS all information on this computer s data base Do you wish to save the current data base y n n Are you sure you wish to CLEAR the disk n y y Mon Jan 3 16 18 23 2000 diskclear CLEARING DATA BASE Mon Jan 3 16 18 23 2000 Each dot represents 10 000 blocks The entire database 1677 dots eet os Sits LO cee ew ces 20s ein iets S0y otek SANS 23s ee 0 Specter ce EE 6 0 sissies ats 5 Ons es te Sh E BOS 5 ee Ss ION E eter S00 Stee Fe a Fs DVO cc 165 2
203. late Effect lines Comment cg bnews 62 7 0 breaking news cg th 76 7 1 today in history cg mm 75 1 money matters cg pball 9996 7 6 powerball cg lottopb 9993 12 Llotto powerball cg cashpb 9994 9 cash3 powerball cg world 50 1 the world cg nation 50 1 the nation cg fancash 9995 8 fantasy 5 cash 3 cg south 50 1 the south cg recap 52 1 recap cg nitetz 53 1 11 tonight cg tvex 67 0 tv exclusive cg uv 68 0 junedited video cg tji 69 0 this just in cg intv1 1 1 jl line interview cg intv 2 2 2 line interview cg intvdate 2 2 jl line interview with date cg loc 4 1 l1 line locator cg locdate 5 2 locator with date cg date 6 7 1 date super cg file 7 0 file tape cg newsfile 7 0 j newsfile cg ctsy 8 1 courtesy cg sktch 10 1 sketches by cg spkng1 11 7 1 speaking one line cg spkng 12 2 speaking two line cg scenes 13 1 scenes from cg locskylv 24 1 live skycam locator cg locsky 16 T locator skycam cg intvskylv 17 2 jinterview skycam live cg repsky 18 1 reporter skycam cg loclv 19 7 1 j live locator cg intvlv 20 2 jlive interview cg intvilv 28 1 live interview 1 line cg live 21 0 jlive cg replv 22 S 1 live generic reporter cg lvsky 23 0 live skycam cg rep 27 z 1 reporter not live cg sky 141 7 0 skycam live 190 cg frsky 254 special for NoonDay cg locn 1002 locator noonday cg scenesn 1022 cg innd 1001 cg lond 1008
204. lias je pagebreak used by various programs and identifies the word used to replace the NSML lt pb gt pagebreak tag when converting to SEP restricted only used by gtraits program and identifies the name used for the restricted user group near runs Primary 164 Both W_PENDING and W_BREAK may appear in the Words Dictionary however they are obsolete Connect Dictionary site dict doac 230 The Connect dictionary contains messages and commands used by the Connect feature The standard name is in uppercase and must not be changed The transla tion can be in lowercase uppercase or mixed case Connect Dictionary Standard Name S_SNPROMPT S_SNCAPON S_SNCAPOFF S_SNPAUSE S_SNESCAPE S_SNQUIT S_SNCAPERR S_SNNOQUEUE S_SNCRERR S_SNCLOSED S_NOSVC S_NOCAPTURE S_SNNOTCAP S_SNEXPECT S_NSCRIPT S_CONNECT S_ACCEPT S_REJECT S_FINISH S_TERMINAL S_RXNET Connect Dictionary site dict doac Translation emd gt Capturing session to Session saved to Pause capture New escape character Quitting Capture error Could not append to queue Error creating capture story Connection closed Unknown service Session not saved to Not capturing Failed to get expected string Could not open script story CONNECT ACCEPT REJECT FINISH TERMINAL RXNET 231 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries 232 Standard Name S_RXDNET S_CCAPTURE S_CQUIT S_C
205. lines trait applies to lines previewed in the Queue panel of the iNEWS Workstation The value of a queue s preview lines trait controls how many lines of each story in the queue are displayed The number in the dis column indicates the preview lines setting You can have a queue display as few as one line of each story or as many as 23 lines The second trait refresh is also listed under dis Refresh controls whether the system automatically updates your screen if you view a queue someone else is changing If the number under dis begins with a D the queue is not refreshed automatically if it begins with an R it is refreshed automatically Preview Lines To change the value of a queue s preview lines trait use dbtraits lt queue name gt dis lt number of lines gt 327 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console 328 Because screens can display a maximum of 22 lines of a story at a time that is the maximum value used with this trait The minimum value is 0 which would show no preview lines For instance to give SHOW RUNDOWNS a one line display type dbtraits show rundown dis 1 SHOW RUNDOWNS now has a one line per story display In a one line display the first line on the screen is the top line of the form assigned to that queue The next 22 lines in the queue display the second line of each story s form Queues that display more than one line per story begin with the top line of each story s form Choosing a val
206. lly shown during a normal boot of the PCU while the 9000 codes represent errors Contact Avid Customer Support for assistance if one of your PCUs displays an error code after being restarted The fol lowing PCU LED Code table lists the codes and their meanings 251 Appendix D PCU Reference 252 PCU LED Codes Code 0000 8000 8002 8003 8004 8005 8006 8100 8101 8102 8888 9001 9002 9003 9004 9005 9006 9007 9010 9011 9012 Meaning Network initialization complete Boot started Connected to host server for download of PCU OS PCU OS download in progress PCU OS downloaded Start received Invoking PCU OS PCU OS started PCU OS network initialized PCU OS fully operational Reset received Error execv failed Error file could not be opened Error no data downloaded Error cannot establish socket connection Error read on socket failed Error receive on socket failed Error send on socket failed Memory management bad free Memory management unknown free Memory management no space PCUs Connecting Devices to a PCU You use the I O ports to connect serial devices such as printers and wires to the PCU These ports are numbered 1 through 8 Use these port numbers in combination with the PCU s device number when assigning device numbers to devices you connect to the PCU These ports are Data Terminal Equipment DTE RS 232 serial ports To connect a device to one of these ports use
207. lt group gt d list save last original none all d list sortfield lt field gt d list wg lt group gt d Queue Options list qindex lt index value gt User Options list blacklist b user list created gt date1 lt date2 user list keyboard lt number gt user list lastlog gt date1 lt date2 user list passchg gt date1 lt date2 user list password user list readrate lt number gt user list session lt number gt user list simplified s user list su n user 141 Appendix A Command References list B list c list d 142 Lists details of the system blobs stored on the server System blobs are used to store bitmaps for the title entry tool and for the simplified user interface settings The following is a sample output list B File Id Size Date Time Name 449 7287 Jul 10 00 07 27 19 BMOOOOOL 457 7238 Jul 10 00 07 28 16 BM0O00002 84435 6066 Nov 30 00 08 16 39 BM000003 84363 6066 Nov 30 00 10 44 13 BMO000004 84403 1171 Nov 30 00 10 56 40 BMO00005 88956 265255 Jan 4 01 16 05 18 BMO00006 103749 15439 Mar 22 01 00 40 24 BM000007 498 11212 Jan 14 00 15 35 28 BM000008 530 15439 Jan 14 00 15 53 46 BM000009 546 91416 Jan 26 00 09 47 30 BM000010 638 14342 Apr 4 00 13 11 17 BMOO00011 653 8608 Apr 4 00 13 18 09 BMO000012 662 26673 Apr 5 00 13 46 54 BMO000013 104423 40 Mar 21 01 15 16 28 SimplifiedUISettings Lists current configuration of the system list c Command Opt
208. mands Used in iNEWS 0 0 0 eee eee Console Control Commands 0 0000 c eee eee eee es Console Server Commands 0 00 cece eee eee es Appendix B connect Command Options 000 00 121 dbrestore Command Key Options 4 129 dbtraits Command Options 2 200005 131 dbtraits Command Modes 2 000002e0 ee 132 dbvisit Command Options 222202005 133 dial Command Options 2 22000 eee eee 134 grpcheck Command Options 200005 137 list c Command Options 2 00000 eee ee 142 list d Command Options 2 000002 00 ee 142 list q Command Options 2000000 ee eee 143 makeccutab Command Options 147 makeshift Command Options 148 maketab Command Options 055 149 msgclean Command Options 00 00 eee eee 149 otod Command Options 2202 eee eee 150 rename Command Options 2 055 153 sitedump Command Options 2 2 05 156 siterestore Command Options 156 softrestore Command Options 157 utraits Command Options 2 000002e eee 160 utraits Command Flags 00 ee 160 Job List Commands 000 00 e eee eee 163 Dialog Commands rerainane rriei a ea eae 169 System
209. message similar to the following appears and displays product version information c 2004 This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalities U S GOVERNMENT USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 of FAR clause 52 227 19 COMMERCIAL COMPUTER SOFTWARE RESTRICTED RIGHTS or in the case of the Department of Defense or its subcontractor is subject to DFARS 227 7202 3 RIGHTS IN COMMERCIAL COMPUTER SOFTWARE OR COMMERCIAL COMPUTER SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION version 2 0 0 21 LINUX You can also use this command to display a particular program s version number Type version followed by the program s name For instance to find out which version of the dbsort program you are using type version dbsort A message similar to the following appears dbsort 2 0 0 21 LINUX 161 Appendix A Command References wholockedit wiredump 162 wholockedit lt queue name gt all Displays who locked a story For instance to find out who locked a story in PEOPLE SMITH type wholockedit people smith To find out who last modified each story in a queue type wholockedit followed by the name of the queue and the keyword a11 wiredump lt device num
210. n key definition line M_KEYOK Keyboard ok M_KEYBAD Keyboard NOT usable M_COMPUTER Computer 206 Utility Messages Dictionary site dict messages Keyboard Check Program Messages for Macros Standard Name M_MACRO M_NOLOCATE M_BADMEMORY M_REFERENCE M_BADSTACK M_MISMATCH M_TWOTILDES M_RESWORD M_TWOTAGS M_NOTILDE M_NOTAG M_UNKNOWN M_IGNORING M_UNEXPECTED M_TWODEFS M_LONESTATE M_DISTRIBUTE M_EMPTY M_NUMKEYNOSHIFT Translation Yos macro d could not locate c d memory allocation error circular reference to macro d unable to stack keywords mismatched c c Multiple c s found no c c found for reserved word s multiple macro keys s s no c found no macro key tag unknown macro key identifier s ignoring s unexpected s duplicate macro definition isolated keyboard state s does not distribute empty macro Shifted numeric keypad 0 9 keys cannot be assigned macros 207 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries Standard Name M_STDHELP M_STDCELLEDIT M_STDFINDNEXT M_STDEXIT M_STDCLOSE M_STDDISCARD M_STDREFRESH M_STDTOGGLETEXTFORM M_STDSCRIPT M_STDPRIORITY QUEUE M_STDALERTSHISTORY M_STDMESSAGEBAR M_STDMESSAGEHISTORY M_STDMAIL M_BADPAUSE Translation Warning Help key redefined Warning Edit Cell key redefined Warning Find Next key redefined Warning Exit key redefined Warning Win
211. n ensures the server accepts any values for the fields it is validating The default is ignore no Applies to action and tx servers ignore del Causes a server to take no action when a story is deleted from its scan queue Applies to action and tx servers This option is not reset for each scan bscan command set Use send del to restore processing of deleted queue entries local lt queue name gt Specifies the primary wire queue Applies to parallel servers mailto lt recipient gt Mails the story as an e mail text message to each recipient The list of recipients is a space separated list If the sendform option is on the content of fields in the story is included at the start of the e mail text message Only fields present in the story form assigned to the story are included Each field is identified by the label text associated with the field in the story form assigned to the story move lt destination queue gt lt distribution code gt Moves stories from the scan queue to a queue you specify optionally adding a distribution code to them It must be the last instruction in a job list task Applies to action and tx servers number lt form field gt lt length gt lt error queue gt Assigns a unique number to each story as the story is processed Specify the form field that will contain the number and the number of digits for the number Applies to action and tx servers 165 Appendix A Command References on op
212. n queue Refresh Replace Read only Sorry Sorted Story Bad usage Too short TRANSFERRED Unable to send mail Unknown command Please stand by Commands Dictionary site dict ccucmds Standard Name Translation D_WORD Word Commands Dictionary site dict ccucmds The Commands dictionary consists of commands and job list commands and their translations Your system s version of this file may be slightly different Commands may be customized by changing their translation definition For instance the default translation of backtime next is ba n as shown in the following commands table You can change the translation to back n or back next or some other translation Commands site dict ccucmds Standard Name Translation air ai air prompter aip air scrollbox ais backtime ba backtime begin bab backtime end bae backtime next ba n backtime pause ba p blank bl bulletin bu connect co 217 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries 218 Standard Name cursor bottom cursor down cursor left cursor right cursor top cursor up define character define erase define paragraph define word delete character delete defined delete recover destination display display norefresh display refresh display story duplicate enter directory enter queue find Translation cu b cud cu1 cur cut cuu def c def e def p def w del c del d del r des di di n dir di s du
213. ndix A Command References dbrestore 128 Any queues that have a write group assigned will not be purged when dbpurge runs as a non superuser The system automatically purges the directories and queues each hour to move old material from high turnover queues such as the Wires queues into the Dead queue Normally locked and held stories are not purged regardless of their age Use this command only in an emergency when you need to regain some space Stories can receive a date in the future if your system date is inaccurate If you have future dated stories because the system date was inaccurately set remove them using the f option or wait until the date expires You must be a console superuser to run dbpurge on write protected queues For instance to purge all stories in the Wires queues older than five hours type dbpurge wires 5 Typing dbpurge purges all queues in the database according to each queue s purge interval dbpurge v does the same and prints a message on the console for each queue purged You can also use dbpurge to remove held and locked stories from the database To remove all locked stories from all queues in the People directory type dbpurge people 1 To remove all held stories from a queue use dbpurge but substitute h for 1 The dbpurge command can be run only on the master computer dbrestore lt key gt option The dbrestore command restores data dumped via dbdump to the iNEWS database Autom
214. ne for Sequential directories The lt position gt parameter can be a lt sibling gt place lt child gt after lt sibling gt b lt sibling gt place lt child gt before lt sibling gt lt number gt move lt child gt up lt number gt positions lt number gt move lt child gt down lt number gt positions lt number gt place lt child gt at lt number gt position The lt child gt and lt sibling gt parameters do not include the full pathname only the last level name relative to the parent name restart v lt device gt all If you restart a device when a user is editing data could be lost Restarts one or more devices an entire PCU and its devices or every PCU and their devices on a server The restart command stops and reloads the currently executing program s To restart a device type restart followed by the device number For instance to restart printer 41 type restart 41 To restart all devices on a PCU type restart followed by the PCU s device number To restart all devices on your system type restart all searchtape send Console Server Commands After each restart you see a Hot to go message for each device as it starts If the device does not start you see a message indicating that the restart of that device has failed searchtape on lt device gt from lt date gt to lt date gt lt max Stories gt for lt word gt searchtape on lt device g
215. ned Not in directory 2 spaces then DUP D 5 spaces then EMPTY System error Already exists Gone home Insert Standard Name D_KEY D_KILLED D_LINE D_LOCKED D_LOGGEDIN D_LOGIN D_MAIL MAILSTORY MAXSONS MESSAGE MODE MOVED o o o o DU g NAMETL J NEW_PASSWORD gJ NOARG gJ NOCMD J NODEFINED NODELETED J g NOFINDSTR gJ NOLOG gJ NOMSG J NOREPSTR NOTBATCH J J NOTEMPTY ccumsgs Dictionary site dict ccumsgs Translation Key must match ccucmd translation 1 space then KILLED Line Locked Logged in Login must match ccucmd translation mail Story Too many Message Invalid in this mode 2 spaces then MOVED Name too long New password Needs argument Unrecognized command Nothing defined Nothing deleted Type word to find Not logged in No messages Type new word Queue lacks that capability Not empty 215 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries Standard Name D_NOTEXIST D_NOUSER D_OFFLINE D_ONAIR D_ORDER D_PASSWORD D_PAUSED D_PERM D_PRINTED D_PURGELOCK D_QONLY D_QUEMODE D_REFRESH D_REPLACE D_RONLY D_SORRY D_SORTED D_STORY D_SYNTAX D_TOO_SHORT D_TXED D_UNABLEMAIL D_UNKNOWN D_WAIT 216 Translation Story moved No such user Offline On air Order Password must match ccucmd translation Paused P PRINTED Queue busy Only in queue Not i
216. ng 1 and pressing Enter To move ahead five lines you could type 5 To move back three lines you could type 3 Launching ed The line editor ed will respond with a question mark if you try to move beyond the last line of the file Additionally you cannot type a minus value greater than or equal to the current line number because you cannot move to a line preceding the first line in the file Within ed pressing Enter with no line number reference or command will cause ed to make the next line in the file the current line displaying that line as it goes For instance in the following example the user selects line 19 in the file then presses the Enter key three times The line editor ed responds each time by displaying lines 20 21 and 22 respectively 19 printer 11 2400 11 s Enter terminal 12 19200 0 news A Enter terminal 13 9600 8n 1 news j Enter wire 14 2400 anpa7 AX A When editing it is necessary to specify the line number s to be acted upon This can be done in several ways e Type the line number e Type starting and ending line numbers separated by a comma e Type period to specify current line number e Type a dollar sign to specify last line in the file The editing command to act upon the specified line s is typed immediately following the specified line s There should be no spaces Here are some examples using the Print command p To make line 18 the current line type 18
217. nothing on the tape that you want to save type y to continue A message similar to the following will appear Starting track 1 block 0 47 stories dumped Ending track 1 block 34 When you back up a queue dbdump ignores the queue s skip flag so you can use it to back up a queue or directory that has its skip flag enabled You can also use this process to save a queue or directory to tape before removing it from the database For instance if you want to restore database space by removing a queue with material no longer used use dbdump to backup the queue first Then if you need it later you can retrieve it from the tape gt If you have previous backups on the tape append the next backup to the tape with dbdump a n lt queue or directory name gt You can append additional backups to that tape until you use up all space on the tape Continuing with the previous example the next day you would insert the same tape make sure its write protect is off and then use dbdump a to append that day s scripts to the tape For instance after making the first backup of SCRIPTS 2004 FEB shown in the previous example back up SCRIPTS 2004 MAR the following month by inserting the same tape and entering the following dbdump a n scripts 2004 mar 61 Chapter 5 Backing Up the iNEWS System If you try to use dbdump a with a tape that does not already contain at least one backup you get an Empty tape message
218. ntative Avid Educational Services For information on courses schedules training centers certifications courseware and books please visit www avid com training or call Avid Sales at 800 949 AVID 800 949 2843 Using This Guide Chapter 1 Introduction As part of the Avid Unity for News broadcast solution the INEWS newsroom computer system is an integrated digital news creation and production system It provides journalists producers directors writers and technical personnel in a newsroom with an array of tools to make their jobs easier This chapter contains the following main sections e What is Avid Unity for NEWS e System Administrator Tasks Chapter 1 Introduction What is Avid Unity for NEWS The Avid Unity for News system is a nonlinear shared storage media network that enables the immediate and simultaneous availability of footage upon acquisition to both journalists and editors the sharing of footage among teams for shot selection script writing and production the parallel editing of news packages and promotions and on air playout without dubbing back to tape within moments of story completion It is a truly integrated broadcasting solution that minimizes lag between processes where even activities such as asset management and Web updating become concurrent tasks that facilitate production without interfering with the primary objective of putting the news on the air In the Avid Unity for News work
219. ntents of queues and directories Generally Wires queues and the Dead queue are usually skip flagged so they are not backed up This results in less time for the backup and less tape used If a dbdump reaches the end of the tape and still has more data to back up you will be prompted for another tape For more information on skip flags also known as Skip Backup database trait See the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual for more information For instance to dump all database items contained in the SCRIPTS 2004 directory to tape you could type dbdump c n script 2004 If you already have dbdump material on tape and you want to append another dbdump to the end of it use the following command NRCS A dbdump ad An append does not overwrite dbdump information currently on the tape See Backing up Individual Queues on page 60 for more information To minimize the impact of any potential problems perform dbdump at less critical usage periods Backing up the Entire Database To back up the entire database to tape 1 Insert a tape into a server s tape drive 2 Select the server that has the backup tape For information on selecting a server see Chapter 2 of the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual 58 Backing up the iNEWS Database 3 Type dbdump c A verification request similar to the following appears Do you really want to create a new archive n y
220. nter to execute the cursor up command The translations may be more than one word long but the dictionaries have limited space so keep each translation as short as possible As a rule make translations just long enough to be unique from any other translation For instance the cursor up command is translated as cu u This is the shortest translation for this command that keeps the translation unique 197 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries If the purpose of a standard name or its translation is not clear clarify them by inserting a comment on the line following the translation Begin the comment line with a semicolon to prevent the system from treating it as part of the translation iNEWS newsroom computer system uses standard names in each dictionary to match each translation to the correct command message or word Do not change any of the standard names in your dictionaries Customizing Dictionaries Your system s dictionaries are text files stored in the site dict directory Because they are text files you can change any dictionary translation using ed the line editor at the console See Appendix H for more information Changing Default Dictionary Values 198 As an example of how to modify a dictionary translation change the enter directory and enter queue commands to make directory and make queue To do this change the translations for enter directory and enter queue from e dande qtoma dandma q respectively
221. ny number other than 1 turns DestinationOrder off and back to its default behavior which is to always display the last visited queue folder as the top item in the destination list gt Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box 8 Close the Registry Editor window The iNEWS newsroom computer system provides users with an e mail addressee name lookup feature When used all groups aliases and users that partially match characters in the To or CC fields are displayed in a Check Name dialog box for user selection This is the default behavior However system administrators can set an environment variable that defines which matches are displayed for selection in the Check Name dialog box Consequently this allows system administrators to hide any groups that exist in the system for reasons other than e mail purposes This environment variable must be created and defined in the Registry Editor at each workstation Default behavior is used at workstations where the environment variable is not defined To set the environment variable 1 Open Registry Editor See To access the Registry Editor on page 274 for more information 2 Navigate to the Environment key and open it 3 Right click on the right side of the Registry Editor window A pop up menu appears 4 Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type DWORD in the Registry Editor 5 Type the name of the new value MailLookup
222. o be a match If you have the expect send a null string it does not send anything but instead waits for the next expected string Although the dialog is suspended while this command is in effect the user can employ the quit connect command to close the connection heol on off If necessary you can have the system insert a hard end of line character HEOL after each line of captured text map mapin mapout Dialog Commands Put the heol on command in the dialog at the point where you want this feature turned on To turn off this feature use heol off If you are calling a device that contains information in tables or columns have the system insert an HEOL at the end of each captured line This way tables and columns you capture retain their format Put the heol on command in the dialog map lt local character gt lt remote character gt Translates a character local character entered at the keyboard to some other character remote character before sending it to the device to which you are connected Likewise if the system receives a remote character from the device the map command translates it to local character before sending it to a workstation mapin lt remote character gt lt local character gt Translates a specific character remote character received from the device to which you are connected to another character local character This translation affects only characters received from the device t
223. o the Dead queue Example utraits richards ka Provides capability to change the user s password Example utraits jordan pass changeme Specifies that user will be forced to change his her password the next time he or she logs in This command line does not require utraits typed in front of it as shown below Example force jordan Assigns a default keyboard set of macros to the user account Example utraits vandenberg key 048 Managing Database Traits from the Console Managing Database Traits from the Console Getting Basic Information To obtain information about a particular queue or directory from the console type list d followed by the name of the directory or queue For instance to obtain information about the WIRES ALL queue type list d wires all information similar to the following appears SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory R I Q X TITLE P4 0 D1 WIRES ALL A trait listing begins with a header line containing the letters SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT each letter in the header line represents a particular database trait That is in the previous example the second letter in the header line an R stands for the database trait Read only When one of these traits is on the letter representing that trait appears in the second line For instance the R in the second line of the example indicates the Read only trait is on SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT sortfield p
224. o which you are connected It has no effect on the character when you enter it mapout lt local character gt lt remote character gt Translates a particular character entered at the workstation local character to another character remote character before it is sent to the device to which you are connected For instance some devices use a limited character set that does not recognize lowercase letters To connect to such a device you would want to map all lowercase characters to their uppercase equivalents For instance to map a to A use this mapout command mapout aA This has no effect on characters received from the device Only characters typed at the workstation are translated 173 Appendix A Command References message pass pause 174 message lt string gt Sends the string to the screen This command informs users that the system is active and functioning during a dialing session pass lt resume character gt Suspends a dialog and yields control to the user Whatever the user enters after the pass command is sent directly to the device to which the user is connected When the user enters the character defined in lt resume character gt parameter pass resumes the dialog To use pass place it in the dialog where you want to yield control to the user and follow it with a character you want the user to enter to resume the dialog When the user enters this character pass sends it to the device and then
225. ommand Summary Location in Display Mode Option SRPlo LIsUGQSXWFiT Keyword Definition Example SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT save Determines how many old story n ola versions are retained in each queue To save only the last version of the People directory this is the default use dbtraits people save To save no version use dbtraits people save n To save only the original version use dbtraits people save o To save all versions use dbtraits people save a SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT x x Indicates whether or not a directory or queue is left out of database backups To leave the Dead queue out of the database backup procedure dbtraits dead x SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT w w Assigned to queues that receive data from wire services It allows the queue to monitor for new stories sent by the wire service appends them to the wire queue and immediately displays them to users who have that wire queue open While this trait can be applied to any queue in the iNEWS newsroom computer system it is crucial that it be assigned to queues receiving data from wire services For instance the command to assign Watch Append to the WIRES ALL queue is dbtraits wires all w 317 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console Location in Display Name SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT Keyword Forms SRP1oO LISUGQSXWFiT f f Allowed F Index SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT index Smee esi amine ae i index Sortfield sortfield SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT
226. on Procedures on page 85 Computer survivor failed both failed survivor both survivor failed 94 A B E AB D O D O sessions back to their regular positions Commands to Run Enter superuser mode offline configure online Reboot failed server s network devices Restart failed server s network devices sbin shutdown f r now Login as system operator Enter superuser mode diskclear reconnect lt failed gt master lt survivor gt net ab Type either reconnect a master b net ab OR reconnect b master a net ab diskcopy s offline logout all stop all configure Wait for the system being configured messages on both restart all online startup Be patient for the server to come up Chapter 7 Troubleshooting This chapter provides information to help you recover from various kinds of system failures This chapter contains the following main sections iNEWS Workstation Problems PCU Wire Ports Locked Blocks How to Check Process Status ps Command Power Failure If they are plugged into different UPSs and they ran through the UPS battery and then lost power and rebooted you will not know if they went down concurrently One UPS may have run longer than another If so more stories may have flowed in on a wire or been saved by a user while the one server was still up and the other was down The database will not be in mirror and you will ne
227. onger in the queue Action servers and txnet links behaved the same way as the rxnet utility program The utility programs servers do not send out notifications when deleting queue entries As a precaution for sites which may want such notification to occur an environment variable can be set to restore the former operation The environment variable is defined in the workstation s Registry as delete notify It must be added in the Environment key of the Registry and should be set to a non zero value To change the setting for delete notify 1 Open Registry Editor See To access the Registry Editor on page 274 for more information 2 Navigate to the Environment key and open it 3 Right click on the right side of the Registry Editor window A pop up menu appears 4 Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type DWORD in the Registry Editor 5 Type the name of the new value delete notify 6 Press Enter 7 To set the Value data option gt Right click on the delete notify value gt Choose Modify from the pop up menu Environmental Variables for Servers The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears Edit DWORD Value 21x Value name deleten Value data Base Cc Hexadecimal Decimal Cancel gt Set the Value data Set the Environment key of the Registry to a non zero value gt Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box 8 Close the Registr
228. onsole Command Summary Mode Option Keyword ap as al dis refresh qform sform Definition Example Indicates whether or not a queue is an abstract printing queue See Abstract Printer on page 325 for more information Indicates how many lines of each story in the queue are displayed See The dis Column on page 327 for more information The form used to display information in the Queue panel Fields selected should be a sub set of fields used in the story form A field included in the queue form that does not actually exist in the story form cannot be written to in the Queue panel In this example the rundown form is assigned as the queue form to the SHOWS 6 PM RUNDOWN queue dbtraits show 6pm rundown qform rundown Indicates the form assigned to be used in the Story Form panel of the Story panel to display form fields In this example the futures form is assigned as the story form to the ASSIGNMENTS TODAY queue dbtraits assignments today sform future 319 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console Location in Display Mode Option Name SRPlo LIsUGQSXWFiT Keyword Definition Example Change Form cform Changes the story form assignment for previously existing stories within a queue and restamps them with a new form name The following example would change the way stories in the 6 o clock show would appear reassigning them to be displayed using a newly designed rundown
229. or D for the host computer server The reconnect command must be entered on all of the currently connected servers as well as the server to be reconnected Thereconnect command will exit with a diagnostic if the specified server is already connected Connects a server to a running INEWS newsroom computer system You must type the diskclear command first on the server being reconnected before reconnecting it to the INEWS newsroom computer system rename u v r lt old name gt lt new name gt rename Command Options u Update user records only changing mail destination and home directory entries that match lt old name gt Vy Verbose output r Resume interrupted operation System must be offline Resuming interrupted operations after changing queue or directory names could cause loss of data 153 Appendix A Command References reorder restart 154 A Renames any directory or queue in the database You must become superuser take the system offline and log out all users before using rename When you use this command the system must be named and offline For instance to rename the People directory to PEOPLE STAFF type rename people people staff The command creates any new directory levels that are necessary reorder lt parent gt lt child gt lt position gt This allows you to change the order of a directory by putting one of the child entries into a new position in the directory Reordering is only do
230. ort does not receive an xoff signal it assumes the printer is processing the print job and pipes it out the port It stops only if the printer tells it to stop If the printer is off line it will transmit an xoff signal back to the port when the port tries to send a print job and print jobs will back up in the SYSTEM PRINTERS queue The system will try to print the job for up to 103 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting three minutes After that time a message will be returned to the user stating the printer is off line and needs attention A similar message appears on the console Occasionally a user will print an entire queue such as WIRES ALL This is called a runaway print job and it must be deleted from the SYSTEM PRINTERS queue To eliminate a runaway print job 1 Power off the printer or put it offline so it stops wasting paper 2 Kill the print jobs in the SYSTEM PRINTERS queue 3 Restart the printer port 4 Turn the printer back on You must restart the printer port because the print job has already been downloaded to the PCU for printing If you kill the print jobs and then turn on the printer it will resume printing the job Each printer port must have a corresponding printer profile in site printers lt port gt For instance if you move a printer from port 26 to port 41 you must also move its profile to the new port number NRCS AS mv site printers 26 site printers 41 Locked Blocks 104 During normal op
231. orth 20 30t50 Inserts copies of lines 20 through 30 after line 50 The Undo command is used to cancel the effects of the last editing command entered For instance 1 5ms u In the above example the user issues a command to move lines 1 through 5 to the end of the file then types u to undo that command The changes you make to a file are not saved immediately This means you could quit or exit ed without saving changes if necessary You must use the Write command to save modifications Quitting ed Launching ed To save changes type w and press Enter The line editor ed will respond by displaying the file size such as w 3624 The Write command is case sensitive If uppercase W is used ed will append the modified version of the file to the end of the original file version This can quickly increase the file size and result in redundancy Always use the lowercase w To exit the line editor type q and press Enter For instance w 3624 q NRCS A In the previous example the user saved changes first by using the Write command w then typed q to quit ed and return to a normal console prompt However if you wanted to quit ed without saving your changes you can do so In this case you would have to type the Quit command twice the first time to notify ed you want to quit and the second time to confirm that you want to quit without saving changes For instance q q NRCS A In the previous example
232. ou can control how much of each story is printed and the print style used to print the story Abstract printing is controlled by the following traits e Abstract Printer e Abstract Lines e Abstract Style To list a queue s abstract printing traits type List d a followed by the queue name For instance to list the abstract traits of WIRES STATE type list d a wires state Database Traits Console Command Summary A display similar to the following appears SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT sortfield ap al as dis directory Q TITLE A000 000 000 D1 WIRES STATE The three abstract printing traits appear toward the middle of the listing under the headings ap a1 and as There is no abstract printing facility for local printing Abstract Printer The abstract printer trait indicates which system printer your system uses to automatically print abstracts for this queue There is no abstract printing facility for local printing To select a printer set this trait to the printer number you want to use This is the same number you would use to select that printer in a print command Use this form of dbtraits dbtraits lt queue name gt ap lt printer number gt For instance to set WIRES STATE to print abstracts on printer 1 type dbtraits wires state ap 1 The format of the abstract printer information is SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT sortfield ap al as dis directory O sseseeascae TITLE A000 000 000 D1 WIRES STATE To list all qu
233. ound sign in the prompt you must be in superuser mode to execute commands Also you must use 24 hour military time dbpurge Superuser conditional Console Server Commands The dboriginal command can also be used to remove old versions from stories in a queue that has the save none attribute When stories are moved to or copied to a queue all old versions are retained even if the queue has this attribute only when a story is edited are the old versions removed It should only be necessary to run this command once or twice a year Below is an example of using the at command to execute a dboriginal command at a specified schedule and directing it to a specified area archive NRCS A at 11 10 exc dboriginal archive lt Ctr1 D gt job 1001340809 a at Sat Jul 10 11 10 00 2004 NRCS A dbpurge lt path gt h 1 lt interval gt dbpurge purges the database to regain space Valid Keys Description Condition used as lt path gt parameter Purges all queues with the default interval V Condition used as lt path gt parameter Purge all queues listed in the command in verbose mode h Include held entries must be superuser to use this option in the purge l Include locked entries must be superuser to use this option in the purge f Include future dated entries must be superuser to use this option in the purge Interval is expressed in lt hours gt or lt days gt lt hours gt 127 Appe
234. our system removes any stories older than their queue s purge interval and places these stories in the Dead queue This process frees up space in your database for new stories You can set a purge interval as days or hours or a combination of both You distinguish between hours and days by using a decimal point To enter hours type the number of hours such as 24 323 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console Abstract Printing Abstract printing is only for system printing 324 To enter the purge interval in days and hours type the number of days a period and the number of hours such as 2 12 To set the purge interval in days type the number of days followed by a period for instance 90 A purge interval of zero means the queue is never purged To set a queue s purge interval use dbtraits lt queue name gt purge lt purge interval value gt For instance to give all queues in the Wires directory a purge interval of two days type dbtraits wires purge 2 To list all queues in the database with a purge interval use list purge lt purge interval gt d To list all queues in a directory with a purge interval use list purge lt purge interval gt d lt directory name gt This group of traits controls whether or not a queue is an abstract printing queue When a story is added to or modified in an abstract printing queue the system automatically prints a portion of the story Using these traits y
235. ow e How many packets have been transmitted e How many input errors Ierrs have been detected e How many output errors Oerrs have occurred Output Errors Oerrs 108 The primary barometer of network health is the Output Errors Oerrs column The computer will try to transmit a packet 15 times before chalking the attempt up as an Oerr It will then try to transmit again 15 times and may wind up incrementing the Oerr count Clean networks will show zero Oerrs or no more than a few Of more concern than the raw number of Oerrs is how quickly they are increasing If you are picking up an Oerr every minute this would be indicative of network problems and a disconnect may be imminent Periodically run a netstat i so you can get a baseline feel for how many Oerrs your system produces each week or month iNEWS and FTS Connectivity ftsdebug Command Input Errors lerrs Input Errors Ierrs are fragments of packets or unrecognizable packets Systems co existing on a Novell Local Area Network LAN generally show many Ierrs although they do not seem to cause problems INEWS and FTS Connectivity ftsdebug Command For more information about Fast Text Search and its utility programs see Chapter 13 in the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual The ftsdebug command can be used to verify communication between the iNEWS Servers and the two server utility programs related to Fast Text Search FTS
236. owse Servers q Low Resolution D Browse amp Rough Cut INEWS NRCS An iNEWS newsroom computer system NRCS provides e News gathering from video audio and text sources e News production including Story creation and script editing Show planning and creation 11 Chapter 1 Introduction For more information see NRCS Components in Chapter 1 of the iNEWS Installation and Upgrade Manual e News to air including On air playback control File exporting Internet publishing In an Avid Unity for News environment Web production processes can occur in parallel with newcast production Some primary components of iINEWS NRCS include Linux based computers running the INEWS Server software In this manual these host computers are referred to as the iNEWS Servers or individually as server A server B and so forth AnIBM Intel compatible personal computer PC running the iNEWS console multiplexor program This PC is known as the console See Chapter 2 of the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual for more information Windows based computer running the iNEWS client software These PCs are known as INEWS Workstations e Other clients such as printers Third Party Connectivity and Open Integration 12 Avid s commitment to open integration and conformance with industry standard technologies is clearly demonstrated as a major feature of the Unity for News product s
237. p e MsgMailAlert e PIColor e ShowTimingBar e SyncToServer e Delete_Notify The following sections explain how to can set up environment variables by editing the Registry using the Registry Editor 275 Appendix F Environment Variables Self importing files called reg files can be executed to automatically import envionment variable information into the Registry These files with their exported registry keys can be used on PCs running Windows NT based operat ing systems For more information on how to obtain and use these reg files contact Avid Customer Support CCColor An individual workstation can have its closed captioning text color changed via an environment variable called CCColor If no environment variable exists then the default color of green is used To change the closed captioning text color 1 page 274 Navigate Open Registry Editor See To access the Registry Editor for more information to the Environment key and open it Right click on the right side of the Registry Editor window A pop up menu appears g Registry Editor Registry Edit View Help a 1 a 1 a ca a 2 a ae Ej a Cmca re E T w H a a a a a a Adds a new DWORD value 276 Lsa MediaProperties MediaResources value not set ZS ystemRoot spstem32 cmd exe co C Program Files Microsoft Hardware Is qe Print Windows_NT PriorityCon
238. p with no parameter moves you back one line A wildcard character can be used to match any character or to a search for a number For instance up 160 will search backwards for the number 160 instead of moving up 160 lines Displays a DOS text file on your console screen Use this command to look at old history that has been saved to disk or to read other disk files such as the console configuration file Before you type this command use the zoom command to display only one server s region on the console screen You can choose any server While you are viewing a file you can only move down through it as opposed to back or up in the file Each time you press the Enter key the file scrolls down one line To stop viewing the file and return to normal console operation press the Command key The command may be abbreviated typing v or view plus the filename will work Restarts the sending and receiving of information by the computers console ports It stands for XON and causes an XON character to be sent to the server for each selected region If you are having trouble communicating with your servers from the console try this command If it does not work use the reset command 119 Appendix A Command References Keyword Explanation zoom lt computer name gt Selects a single server and fills the console screen with its region To return the screen to its normal split screen multi region state select any serv
239. people To execute a hogs command and send the results to a system printer use the following format NRCS AS print lt system printer number gt hogs As indicated by the pound sign in the prompt you must be in superuser mode to execute commands Also you must use 24 hour military time idiff list Console Server Commands A display similar to the following appears USED SHARED HELD LOCKED PURGE QUEUE NAME 0 136 20 0 0 0 PEOPLE ARLIN This command can take up to 12 hours to generate The primary number to observe is the number under USED If this number is much higher for a certain queue than the numbers for other queues you can determine where material needs to be downsized Below is an example of using the at command to execute a hogs command at a specified schedule sending the results to a file hogs report and then using the doc command to copy that file to a queue for later review NRCS A at 11 10 exc hogs gt tmp hogs report doc pu people sysadmin notes tmp hogs report lt Ctrl D gt job 1001340698 a at Sat Jul 10 11 10 00 2004 NRCS A idiff lt filel gt lt file2 gt This command allows you interactively compare two files and select and or edit the portions of the files that differ and create a composite file The program displays the differing portions of two files and gives you the option to put the portion from the first file or the second file into the output file
240. percase or mixed case Dial Dictionary Standard Name C_USAGE C_MDMTO C_NOCONS C_MDMRDY C_DSYSERR C_MDMNOT C_MDMNODIAL C_MDMNOHUP C_MDMHUP Translation Dial bad usage Modem timed out Could not open dev console Line ready Dial system error Modem not responding Modem not responding to dial command Modem did not hang up Check modem Modem is hung up Standard Name C_QUITQ Keyboard Macros Dictionary site dict keymacros Translation Do you really want to quit y n Keyboard Macros Dictionary site dict keymacros The keyboard macros dictionary contains names of keyboard keys for use in keyboard macro definitions for iNEWS NRCS Like other dictionaries the standard name is in uppercase and must not be changed Translations can be in lowercase uppercase or mixed case Keyboard Macros Dictionary Standard Name K_NULL K_Fl K_F2 K_F3 K_F4 K_F5 K_F6 K_F7 K_F8 K_F9 K_F10 K_F11 K_F12 Translation null f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 f8 f9 f10 f11 f12 237 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries 238 Standard Name K_KPO K_KP1 K_KP2 K_KP3 K_KP4 K_KP5 K_KP6 K_KP7 K_KP8 K_KP9 K_INSERT K_HOME K_PAGEUP K_PAGEDOWN K_DELETE K_END K_UP K_DOWN K_LEFT K_RIGHT K_SHIFT K_CTRL Translation kp0 kp1 kp2 kp3 kp4 kp5 kp6 kp7 kp8 kp9 insert home pageup pagedown delete end up down eft right
241. procedure delay nn Use this command to pause the dialog while the service continues connect and login processes nn is the number of seconds you want the dialog to pause before continuing to the next command type lt text gt Use this to send a message to the device the workstation is being connected to lt text gt includes the message To send your login data such as an account number type type lt text gt Type pass to yield control to the user after login is complete This command instructs the dialog to pass whatever the user enters to the device to which the service has connected 21 Chapter 2 Connect Services Dialog Commands Dialog Examples 22 Use pass x to include a character the user can enter to cue the dialog to resume The x should be a character or symbol such as the at symbol he or she will not normally use Use pass alone to instruct the system to accept what the user enters until he she closes the connection Type commands to log out of the service When the user exits a connection using the quit connect command the dialog resumes and performs the logout process and closes the connection Attach the dialog to the service by placing the dialog s name in the service s dialog parameter in the service table located in the SYSTEM SERVICE queue Type the configure s command to incorporate this change into the service Available dialog commands
242. pursuant to FAR 12 212 a and or DFARS 227 7202 1 a as applicable Trademarks 888 I O AirPlay AirSPACE AirSPACE HD AniMatte AudioSuite AudioVision AutoSync Avid AVIDdrive Av IDdrive Towers AvidNet AvidNetwork AVIDstripe Avid Unity Avid Xpress AVoption AVX CamCultter ChromaCurve ChromaWheel DAE D Fi D fx Digidesign Digidesign Audio Engine Digidesign Intelligent Noise Reduction DigiDrive DigiTranslator DINR D Verb Equinox ExpertRender FieldPak Film Composer FilmScribe FluidMotion HIIP HyperSPACE HyperSPACE HDCAM IllusionFX Image Independence Intraframe iS9 iS18 iS23 iS36 Lo Fi Magic Mask make manage move media Marquee Matador Maxim MCXpress Media Composer MediaDock MediaDock Shuttle Media Fusion Media Illusion MediaLog Media Reader Media Recorder MEDIArray MediaShare Meridien MetaSync NaturalMatch Nearchive NetReview NewsCutter OMF OMF Interchange OMM Open Media Framework Open Media Management ProEncode Pro Tools QuietDrive Recti Fi RetroLoop rS9 rS18 Sci Fi Softimage Sound Designer Il SPACE SPACEShift Symphony the Avid DS logo Trilligent UnityRAID Vari Fi Video Slave Driver VideoSPACE and Xdeck are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Avid Technology Inc in the United States and or other countries iNEWS iNEWS ControlAir and Media Browse are trademarks of iNews LLC All other trademarks contained herein are the property of their respecti
243. queue instead of the limit of 10 stories when it has more than one queue to scan The everyentry option forces the server to process each entry in a queue not just modified entries distribution lt distribution story queue gt lt error queue gt Specifies the queue containing the distribution story and optionally an error queue for stories whose distribution codes cannot be processed Applies to distribution and parallel servers dup lt destination queue gt lt distribution code gt Copies the stories in the scan queue to a queue you specify optionally including a distribution code with them Applies to action and tx servers every lt dd hh gt Specifies the interval at which a task is performed You can set this value in days and or hours Applies to action and tx servers extension lt file extension gt Applies to tx servers When transmitting stories using HTML format each transmitted story has a filename composed of a hexadecimal representation of the entry s qstamp and a filename extension of htm1 Use the extension command to specify a different extension Do not include the period in the lt file extension gt parameter The defined extension will also be used in place of ht m1 for the published file See the publish job list command for more information ignore ignore del local mailto move number Job List Commands ignore yes no Including ignore yes ina job list that performs validatio
244. queues and directories depending on the information they hold Setting purge intervals appropriate for stories in various queues helps keep the database from growing too large Once an hour at 15 minutes after the hour an automatic dbpurge program scans each queue for stories older than the queue s purge interval and moves these stories into the Dead queue Stories sent to the Dead queue are not erased until the system needs the space Until the system reclaims this space stories in the Dead queue can be read searched edited copied or printed To retrieve a story from the Dead queue select the story and copy it to a different queue in the database where you have write permission Although you can open stories in the Dead queue they are marked for removal and will be permanently removed when the system detects the computer is running out of storage space Your system keeps track of the space available by examining and maintaining a list of free space on the disk The free list is explained in Monitoring the Free List on page 43 Monitoring Free Space Understanding Database Storage Units Your computer s disk is divided into blocks The database portion of the disk is divided into 1024 byte blocks When a story is saved the system allocates as many blocks as necessary to hold the story and then divides the story among those blocks Blocks used to hold a story need not be sequential a story can be saved in blocks that ar
245. r e Unknown When you reconnect the CPUs following a diskclear When the diskcopy procedure has com pleted and the database has been mirrored the disk status will change back to OK To list basic system information type status A message similar to the following appears A is online ID is NRCS System is AB Master is A Disk status is UNKNOWN To list system options set in the system profile type status all To list the system s license information type status license stop su unbusy Console Server Commands stop v all lt device number gt If you stop a device when a user is editing on the device data could be lost Stops activity on a server prior to shutting it down Before using the stop command to stop an activity use the broadcast command to notify users the system will be going down and log out all devices on the affected servers To stop all devices on a server use stop all To stop a device follow stop with the number of the device you want to stop For instance to stop workstation 12 type stop 12 The stop all command differs from the shutdown command in that the free list remains in memory and is not flushed back to the disk su This Linux command allows you to enter superuser mode Type su then type the superuser password when prompted The display looks similar to the following NRCS AS su password SU so dev console unbusy i lt q
246. r e Device where the user logged in last e When user became a user e Date of the last login Date when password was last changed In the previous example only user Levy has not changed passwords within the last 90 days So use the send console command to send a message reminding Levy to change passwords NRCS A send levy Please change your password A message similar to the following appears message sent to levy 301 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console 302 Use the less than lt and greater than gt operators to specify whether you want to list people who last changed their password before lt or after gt a certain date When metacharacters amp lt gt space or tab or control operators amp amp amp lt newline gt are used in a command string threy must be escaped with a backslash character The following are some examples list passchg lt 05JUL2004 u produces a list of all users who last changed their password before July 5 2004 list passchg gt 10 u produces a list of users who have changed their password after 10 days ago that is within the last 10 days You can also use list u to list people who last changed their passwords sometime between two dates such as between June 15 2004 and July 1 2004 You can even use this command to check a single user or a group of users To the afore mentioned use this format of the List command list passchg gt
247. r vb 306 Name in Modify User Account dialog box Broadcast Control Connect Services Toolbars Color Highlights Highlight Read Stories Reorder Stories Utrait Console Command td td c Cc CS cs CC cc hr hr 0 0 User Traits Console Command Summary Definition Example Enables the user to employ the technical director s workstation for broadcast control Example utraits miller td Allows user to connect to any service defined in the system Example utraits smith C Allows users to create custom toolbars Example utraits carver cs Allows users to configure custom sta tus colors Example utraits bagley cc Specifies that unread stories in the queue are highlighted on the user s screen Example utraits davis hr Specifies that user can create and remove stories from a folder or queue Example utraits lumpkin o 307 Name in Modify User Account dialog box Create Kill Fold ers Queues Kill All Stories Password button Force Change check box User Preferences but ton Sessions tab Keyboard field Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console Utrait Console Command er er ka ka password force key Definition Example Specifies that user can create and remove entire folders and queues Example utraits delany er Specifies that user can select an entire queue and move stories in it t
248. r logs in or out This message includes n if the user is a superuser An unsuccessful login by a superuser generates a message only if the device type used is included in W_LOGTYPES Using login tracking in conjunction with console history and disk logging you can keep accurate records of who is using your system and when and where they are connecting to it A listing of currently logged in users may be obtained from the console using the list s command See list s on page 144 for more information Using Group Security to Control System Access Your system is designed to be used by a wide range of people For the system to accommodate so many diverse job roles restrict sensitive areas of your database to authorized users The system provides a powerful security feature that lets you restrict access to important directories and queues A Security ensures that only authorized people can view or make changes to important queues It does not provide absolute privacy because superusers can open any story while performing normal system maintenance Warn your staff not to store personal or confidential material in the database 39 Chapter 3 Database Security Many security features in iNEWS involve establishing groups and assigning privileges and restrictions to them Chapter 6 of the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual gives you complete information about using the group features in iNEWS to help you maint
249. r that change across to the other server s database If the server cannot contact the other server for a period of 30 seconds it assumes the worst that the other server has died and is not available and that as the surviving server it must be responsible for the entire system 83 Chapter 6 Disconnects Knowing this design it is obvious that network outages will cause a disconnect as will the loss of power by one server A dirty network leading to numerous network output errors called Oerrs asrevealed by the netstat i command can cause a disconnect particularly if the output errors are rapidly climbing A software error that leads to a looping condition that causes a server to become so busy it cannot respond to a mirroring request could also theoretically lead to a disconnect Hardware failures such as the failure of a network card or hard drive may also lead to disconnects Disconnect Recovery Overview 84 This section provides an overview of recovering your system from a disconnect recovery procedures and a quick reference worksheet you can use should a disconnect occur After a system has disconnected one server must be selected to continue on as the master computer This server will be referred to as the survivor The other server will be referred to as the failed server Before the failed server can be reconnected to the survivor it must be rebooted and its database wiped clean After the database on
250. rd servers validate lt validation queue gt lt error queue gt Activates form field validation for a server It must include the queue name containing the validation story and an error queue for stories that cannot be validated Applies to action and tx servers Dialog Commands This section describes the dialog commands Some of these commands are equivalent to those available to a user during a connect session while others are unique to dialogs Each command must begin on a new line and can be uppercase or lowercase The system does not check dialogs for errors Many of these commands take one or more strings as their parameters These strings are text and can be entered from the keyboard or if you need to include characters not available from your keyboard use their aliases or decimal equivalents This applies to nonprinting characters such as Escape and Enter which are represented by lt esc gt and lt cr gt respectively 169 Appendix A Command References capture delay 170 Depending on which character set is used by the device to which you connect you may need to translate certain keyboard characters to characters understood by the device You may also need to translate some of the characters sent by the device to characters usable by your system Translating characters is called mapping and there are three commands map mapin and mapout that allow you to do this While these commands are also available to
251. riate host section of the configuration file site config to see devices for which it is responsible If the system is A then the configuration section for host a ais con sulted This section will contain all the device and session numbers including those that normally run on the failed server B You must enter superuser mode at the console to configure the system NRCS AS su Password NRCS A and then run this command sequence NRCS A offline NRCS A configure NRCS A online Step 3 Halt and reboot the disconnected failed server Type the following commands NRCS B sbin shutdown f r now Step 4 Reboot the disconnected failed server s network devices PCUs and MCSPCs It may not be necessary in all cases to reboot the PCUs and MCSPCs They may restart normally without a reboot Reinitializing them by cycling the power virtually guarantees successful restarts Keep a current printout of your site config file near your control console for handy reference during emergencies such as disconnects Step 5 Restart the disconnected failed server s network devices PCU MCSPCs on the survivor Restart the failed server s PCUs and MCSPCs on the survivor NRCS A restart lt number gt 87 Chapter 6 Disconnects 88 You may string multiple device numbers on one line like this restart 10 20 30 19 145 After you restart all failed disconnected server s network devices on the survivor the survivor wil
252. rk failure can disable the entire system The simplest way to test network connectivity is to try to ping other computers on the network When you ping a server your computer sends a pulse across the network The pulse then is echoed back from the target server and returns to the sending computer in the form of ICMP replies If the network or server is down you will not get replies from the server or computer you are trying to ping NRCS AS ping 152 165 17 110 OR NRCS AS ping nrcs a In the previous ping command examples the number of ping requests sent would continue endlessly To control the number of ping requests use a specific number to limit the number of requests For instance in the following examples five ping requests will be attempted as noted by including the number 5 in the ping command NRCS AS ping 5 152 165 17 110 OR NRCS AS ping 5 nrcs a 107 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting In the case of an iNEWS Workstation that is having problems connecting the first step is to try pinging the server from the workstation to make sure they can see each other on the network The syntax for ping on Windows is different than the Linux ping command If computers are unable to ping each other check for a loose or disconnected network cable or a hub that may have lost power netstat i Command One diagnostic command you can run on the server to quantify network errors is the netstat i command The netstat i will sh
253. ropriate for the language you are using edit the site dict shift file to remap character conversions You can map ranges of values as shown in the default dictionary file or you can map values one by one if necessary When editing the dictionary file follow these guidelines Ensure all keywords tolower toupper end in the dictionary file remain in lowercase e Specify all character conversions in terms of the characters decimal values in the conversion table e Do not specify a value higher than 255 241 Appendix C Standard Dictionaries e Any characters not mapped in the dictionary file remain the same when shifted The system ignores blank lines in the dictionary file and any characters following a semicolon After you edit the dictionary file run the makeshift console command in maintenance mode during installation to prepare the Case shifting dictionary for use by the iINEWS newsroom computer system For more information call Avid Customer Support If you map a character to more than one value the system displays a warning when you type the makeshift command but uses the last character mapping in the file MCS Dictionary site dict mcs 242 The MCS dictionarycontains the following e Device Types Used by Monitor Servers and Drivers e Special Strings Recognized by the Monitor Server Error Messages for the Monitor Server Error Messages Shared by Monitor Servers and Drivers Driver
254. rs Disaster Recovery Dbdump The first step is to create a stripped down dbdump that contains the directory structure and minimal amount of queues and directories needed to bring the system online After the minimal dbdump was restored users can start working while the remainder of the database is restored from the last full database dbdump tape Create Minimal dbdump 74 The entire structure of the database along with your designated minimal set of queues can be backed up specifying the list of essential queues or directories to be backed up NRCS A dbdump ci d n lt directory or queuename gt The d option dumps the news directory skeleton but will not dump any stories The n option will dump the stories in any directories and or queues specified The i option will dump the isam files The essential directories would be System and possibly Show and a few daily Assignments queues The System directory must be part of the minimal dbdump If master rundown skeletons are stored elsewhere add them to your list of essential queues This may be the bare minimum of directories needed to get a show on the air Backing up Software Do not store archives of shows beneath the Shows directory Having years of archive material mixed in along with your rundowns and master rundowns will slow the dbrestore significantly If restoring Assignments queues ensure you restore only daily queues needed to operate do not include
255. rver keyword server server server server server server site config server 236 seek 231 seek server server 241 ftsindex 241 Fast Text Indexing server 242 ftsseek 242 Fast Text Search server 243 ftsseek 242 Fast Text Search server 244 ftsseek 242 Fast Text Search server 245 ftsseek 242 Fast Text Search ACTION SERVERS server 251 action 251 timed action server 252 action 252 timed action server 253 action 253 timed action server 254 action 254 timed action server 255 action 255 timed action server 256 action 256 timed action server 257 action 257 timed action server 258 action 258 timed action server 259 action 259 timed action server 260 action 260 timed action MONITOR SERVERS Only 1 rundown per monitor server server 271 monitor 271 Morning Show server 272 monitor 272 725 Cut in server 273 monitor 273 755 Cut in server 274 monitor 274 825 Cut in server 275 monitor 275 855 Cut in server 276 monitor 276 5PM server 277 monitor 277 6PM server 278 monitor 278 10PM server 279 monitor 279 Updates Afternoon server 280 monitor 280 Updates Evening server 281 monitor 281 server 282 monitor 282 server 283 monitor 283 2 server 284 monitor 284 server 285 monitor 285 i server 286 monitor 286 server 287 monitor 287 A server 288 monitor 288 server 289 monitor 289 server
256. ry on page 304 shows user traits their Console abbreviations and detailed information about them Modifying User Traits from the Console Modifying User Traits from the Console You must be a superuser or user manager umanager to change user traits For an explanation of the superuser privileges and for an explanation of the umanager account and privileges see iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual Use the utraits command which requires superuser privileges to modify a user s traits from the console The syntax of the utraits command is utraits userid trait new value trait new value flag For instance to set the read rate for a user named Daniel Mitchell whose User ID is danielmi the command would look something like this NRCS A utraits danielmi readrate 195 1 user records modified RCS A o give him superuser privileges H Z zZ RCS A utraits danielmi su n 4 1 user records modified NRCS A To take superuser privileges away from him NRCS A utraits danielmi su 1 user records modified NRCS A The blacklist trait is a flag that is it is either on or off You grant flag traits with a plus sign you take them away with a minus sign To blacklist the user NRCS A utraits danielmi b 1 user records modified NRCS A To remove him from blacklist status NRCS A utraits danielmi b 1 user records modified NRCS A 297 Appendix G M
257. ry Editor Type the name of the new value MsgMailAlert Press Enter To set the Value data option gt Right click on the MesgMailAlert value gt Choose Modify from the pop up menu The Edit DWORD Value dialog appears Edit DWORD Value Value name M sgM aildlert Value data Hexadecimal Ae Base C Decimal Cancel gt Set the Value data by typing one of the following options 0 disable no alerts whatsoever on status bar 1 neither persistent alerts flash for 15 seconds 2 only message alerts persistent 3 only mail alerts persistent 4 both alerts persistent alerts will not go away until user has read all correspondence 281 Appendix F Environment Variables PiColor 282 8 The default behavior without the Registry value MsgMailAlert defined at a workstation is 1 Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box 9 Close the Registry Editor window An individual INEWS Workstation can have its presenter instructions text color changed via an environment variable called PIColor If no environment variable exists then the default color of red is used To change presenter instructions text color l Open Registry Editor See To access the Registry Editor on page 274 for more information Navigate to the Environment key and open it Right click on the right side of the Registry Editor window A pop up menu appears Select the D
258. s workstations wires and other devices from making further changes to the database After using the stop all console command wait a few seconds for the prompt to reappear When it does proceed to the next step Ensure system is offline and that you have stopped all PCUs and network devices If you do not do this before cleaning your database you may corrupt the data when you perform the cleanup 2 Start the database cleanup by doing the following a Select only the master computer typically server A b Enter superuser mode 51 Chapter 4 Database Management c Type dbvisit d A message similar to the following appears 09 31 45 opening database 09 31 45 traversing roots The d instructs dbvisit to print a period each time it visits a new queue and a colon for every 1 000 stories in a queue After you have done a few cleanups you can judge how far dbvisit has progressed by the number of periods it has printed When you run dbvisit it begins with the root file structure and then examines the entire directory As it inspects the root files and then the directory dbvisit prints messages indicating its progress 3 When you see the message traversing directory do the following a Select the master computer typically server A on your system b Enter superuser mode if you haven t already c Type dbvisit dr Running dbvisit on all servers instead of just the master computer is optional If all servers ar
259. s products or the software for any reason including copyright or patent infringement or lost data even if Ray Sauers Associates has been advised knew or should have known of the possibility of such damages The following disclaimer is required by Videomedia Inc Videomedia Inc makes no warranties whatsoever either express or implied regarding this product including warranties with respect to its merchantability or its fitness for any particular purpose This software contains V LAN ver 3 0 Command Protocols which communicate with V LAN ver 3 0 products developed by Videomedia Inc and V LAN ver 3 0 compatible products developed by third parties under license from Videomedia Inc Use of this software will allow frame accurate editing control of applicable videotape recorder decks videodisc recorders players and the like The following disclaimer is required by Altura Software Inc for the use of its Mac2Win software and Sample Source Code 1993 1998 Altura Software Inc Attn Government User s Restricted Rights Legend U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS This Software and its documentation are commercial computer software or commercial computer software documentation In the event that such Software or documentation is acquired by or on behalf of a unit or agency of the U S Government all rights with respect to this Software and documentation are subject to the terms of the License Agreement
260. shoot problems One of the most common would be a request to check on the status of a process using the ps command NRCS AS ps ef The ps ef command returns a list of all the processes currently running on the server On large systems there can be hundreds or even thousands of processes The process list gives useful information about each process including the process owner when it was started on which terminal port it started how much processor time has been expended on the process and so forth You can also use piping with the fgrep command to search the process list for a particular process and check whether it is running This example produces a full process list and then filters it for the lines that contain the word workserver NRCS AS ps ef fgrep workserver When you use fgrep on the process list for a specific word two processes are usually returned in the display One line is the process you are looking for and one line is the fgrep process that looked for that word 105 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting If you know a particular process ID number you can check to see if that process is running or has completed ps p lt pid gt If the process is still running you will get a one line process list for that number PID TTY TIME CMD 516 tablet 0 01 workserver If it is not running the command will simply return a header line like this PID TTY TIME CMD You may also use ps fp fora fuller listing Power Fa
261. sortfield Qasesehe sn sco Soe Title Purge Interval purge 318 Mode Option Definition Example Must be assigned to all queues in the forms directory The forms will not work without this database trait applied Additionally this trait can be assigned to any queue in the database but is usually only assigned to other queues that receive stories from other systems via rx tx and then build forms for those stories as needed For instance the command to assign the forms allowed trait to the SYSTEM FORMS R queue is dbtraits system forms r f Assigned to queues and directories that you want to be indexed by the Fast Text Search FTS server Allows for quicker searching of the queue or directory For instance the command to assign this trait to the WIRES ALL queue is dbtraits wires all index Indicates which form field a sorted queue is sorted by See Sortfield on page 321 for more information When the sortfield is on all the stories in the queue are sorted When used on a large queue the command prompt and control will not be returned until the entire queue is sorted This may take a long time dependin on the size of the queue Indicates the age stories in a queue can reach before they are purged See Purge Interval on page 323 for more information Location in Display Name SRPlo LIsUGQSXWFiT AbstractPrinting Display Lines Refresh Queue Form Story Form Database Traits C
262. status B is ONLINE and has been CONFIGURED ID is NRCS System is AB Master is A Disk status is OK The database is OPEN When the system is dual and databases are mirroring between the two servers a story written on one server is automatically mirrored to the database of the other server When the system is connected and has the normal prompt the servers are in communication with each other and the disk mirroring process is active Disconnects If the servers disconnect from each other the link is severed and stories written on one are no longer mirrored to the other server After the system has disconnected the databases are no longer mirrored between the two servers and immediate attention is required Since mirroring has stopped stories written by users on server A will not be seen by users logged in to server B There will be two entirely separate databases 80 Disconnects There is no way to reintegrate two disparate databases You must decide which database will be retained as the master database and the other database must be erased The steps for recovering from a disconnect are outlined later in Procedures on page 85 If a disconnect occurs users may want to export the stories they are working on to local hard drives in addition to normally saving them to the server They can export stories by selecting File gt Export Story This will make a backup copy of the story on the local hard drive of their
263. status bar if displayed at the bottom of the iINEWS session Types of Disconnect When the servers disconnect one may disconnect from the other or they may both disconnect from each other 82 Disconnects If they have disconnected from each other each will report that it is a single system with itself as the master NRCS A status A is ONLINE and has been CONFIGURED ID is NRCS System is A Master is A Disk status is OK The database is OPEN The single system status is reported identically on both servers NRCS B status B is ONLINE and has been CONFIGURED ID is NRCS System is B Master is B Disk status is OK The database is OPEN The other possibility is that servers will disconnect but one of the servers will not note the disconnect In this case one will report that the system is single while the other states the system is still AB Regardless of the report once one of the servers has disconnected the system must be recovered following the procedures in this chapter The steps outlined are the only way to recover and get the servers back in mirror A If the system has disconnected you cannot simply reboot the servers and bring it back up normally Rebooting and connecting two servers together after a disconnect can lead to database corruption Causes of Disconnects Servers are normally in constant communication with each other When a story is saved the server tries to mirro
264. stomizing Dictionaries Utility Messages Dictionary site dict messages ccumsgs Dictionary site dict ccumsgs Commands Dictionary site dict ccucmds Queues Dictionary site dict queues Words Dictionary site dict words Connect Dictionary site dict doac Telex Dictionary site dict telex Dial Dictionary site dict dial Keyboard Macros Dictionary site dict keymacros Printer Messages Dictionary site dict printmsgs Case shifting Dictionary site dict shift MCS Dictionary site dict mcs Appendix C Standard Dictionaries Using Dictionaries to Define Messages and Commands 196 Most commands messages and many queues your iINEWS newsroom computer system uses are defined in dictionaries Your system has a number of these dictionaries each defining a particular group of commands messages or words such as the names of all commands are defined in the ccucmds dictionary Many messages your system uses are defined in the ccumsgs dictionary Dictionaries let you customize your system s messages workstation and commands as well as the names of many of the queues your system uses such as SYSTEM SEEK You can change the names of any of your system s required queues by editing their definitions in the queues dictionary and then having your system read the modified dictionary If you customize your dictionary entries keep a log of the changes you make so your changes can be re entered after future software
265. sy Stories iNEWS Workstation Problems To assign permission to a user 1 Use the list g lt username gt command to determine which groups the user belongs to 2 Compare assigned user groups to groups assigned to the directory or queue To do this use the list d g lt name of queue gt command 3 If necessary add the user to the appropriate group story or stories in SYSTEM GROUPS See Chapter 6 in the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual for more information If a user can create new stories in a queue but not edit existing stories it may be because existing stories were created when the queue had another write group assigned to it Previous stories would have been created with previous security restrictions To change the group permissions on existing stories use the gtraits command in the following format gtraits c lt name of queue gt A user may also be unable to access a queue or story in the database if another user is ordering that queue or editing the story The queue or story becomes free when the other user finishes the operation but until then it is considered to be busy Only one user can edit a story at a time No one else can edit that story until the first user is done with it If a second user tries to edit a story that another user is working on the second user will get a message that the story is busy When a user opens a story for editing the system puts an edit lock
266. symbol 3 pound sign 4 dollar sign 5 percent 6 carrot 7 amp ampersand 8 asterisk 9 open parenthesis 0 close perenthesis _ dash underscore Decimal D roS NEA U ay e e Pa na O Hexadecimal 29 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA 0B 0C 285 Appendix F Environment Variables equal plus 13 0D Backspace 14 OE Tab 15 OF Q 16 10 WwW 17 11 E 18 12 R 19 13 T 20 14 Y 21 15 U 22 16 I 23 17 Oo 24 18 P 25 19 open bracket brace 26 1A close bracket brace 27 1B Caps Lock 58 3A A 30 1E S 31 1F D 32 20 F 33 21 G 34 22 H 35 23 J 36 24 K 37 25 L 38 26 semicolon colon 39 27 accent quote 40 28 backslash pipe 43 2B Left Shift 42 2A Z 44 2C X 45 2D 286 Key oF ak SS lt comma less than gt period greater than slash question mark Right Shift CTRL Control keys ALT Alt keys Spacebar ESC Escape key F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 INS Insert key DEL Delete key Home End Page Up Page Down Decimal 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 29 56 57 1 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 87 88 82 83 71 79 73 80 Environment Variables Registry Values Hexadecimal 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 1D 38 39 01 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 57 58 52 53 47 4F 49 51 287 Appendix F Environment Variables SyncToServer 288
267. t just lt date gt lt max Stories gt for lt word gt Use one of the following date formats YY YYMM YYMMDD or CCYYMMDD Searches a tape created by the dbdump command and recovers stories from it Stories that contain a word specified in your search are restored to the queue SYSTEM SEARCHTAPE For instance to search a tape for stories containing the word dinosaur type searchtape for dinosaur A message similar to the following appears 8 stories restored to SYSTEM SEARCHTAPE In this case searchtape found eight stories containing the word dinosaur and placed them in SYSTEM SEARCHTAPE When searching a tape you can specify a date range when the story was saved as well as the maximum number of stories for the system to restore send lt username gt lt message gt Lets you send instant and intersystem messages to users from the console Messages can be sent to the special user comput er on another system by using the username computer other system These messages are printed on the console of the other system Here are two examples of messages sent to user Smith send smith are you editing ap arson send smith please log out now 155 Appendix A Command References shutdown sitedump Superuser only A siterestore Superuser only 156 A shutdown Typing this command while users are editing may cause data loss Stops all devices and closes
268. t 16 gt lt 25 gt lt 29 gt lt 30 gt lt 35 gt lt 42 gt lt 60 gt lt 61 gt lt 62 gt lt 64 gt lt 91 gt lt 92 gt lt 93 gt lt 94 gt lt 95 gt lt 123 gt lt 124 gt lt 125 gt lt 126 gt lt EOT gt lt SP gt TTS SPACE BAND lt SP gt EM SPACE lt SP gt THIN SPACE lt SP gt EN SPACE EN LEADER Ss EM LEADER lt 23 gt HARDEOL lt 23 gt HARDEOL lt 23 gt HARDEOL N 1 8 1 4 3 8 B 1 2 5 8 3 4 7 8 console cfg console cfg log b log 32764 computer A server name a label NRCS irq 3 hostess 2c0 speed 9600 computer B server name b label NRCS irg 3 hostess 2c8 speed 9600 computer C server name c label NRCS irq 3 hostess 2d0 speed 9600 modem remote console password issecret timeout 6 00 irg 3 hostess 2d8 speed 2400 185 Appendix B System Files SYSTEM CLIENT WINDOWS 186 Either IP address or network card information is acceptable IP address is preferable 125 1 100 1 125 1 100 2 125 1 100 3 125 1 100 4 02608c7e519f 02608c7e1790 02608c7e51a8 02608c7e6c01 125 1 100 9 125 1 100 10 125 1 100 11 125 1 100 12 125 1 100 13 125 1 100 14 125 1 100 15 125 1 100 16 125 1 100 17 125 1 100 18 125 1 100 19 125 1 100 20 125 1 100 21 125 1 100 22 02608cdbe7a2 02608cd95e7e 702608c7e178e 02608c7e67aa ns005 michel ns006 ns007 ns008 02608c7e52c6 02608c7e5260 0020aff431ff 02608c7e6bfc 02608c
269. t is capable of supporting This ensures that if one server fails the surviving server s have enough reserve capacity to run the failed server s PCUs Divide your system s PCUs evenly among your system s servers This yields maximum performance possible from each server If a server fails reconfigure the failed server s PCUs to the surviving servers until the failed server is repaired There are two kinds of PCUs older models in rack mount cases and newer models in standard PC cases The latter is referred to as a PC PCU A PC PCU can be an ordinary PC with special additional hardware to give it more serial ports This section describes the rack mount models For more information about PC PCUs see iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual A PCU is essentially a DOS PC A PCU s front panel contains one or two LED displays and reset switches The reset switches allow you to clear the PCU s memory prior to restarting it LEDs display the PCU s device number or current status This section describes parts of a PCU with which you need to be familiar to do normal system maintenance work It also describes how to reset the PCU how to connect the PCU to a server and how to connect devices to the PCU Avid no longer supports CCUs If your system has existing CCUs that have been upgraded to PCUs such devices must be configured as PCUs PCUs Resetting a PCU Occasionally there may be a need to reset a PC
270. t to the default Ctrl when the user closes the connection expect lt delimiter gt lt stringl gt lt delimiter gt lt string2 gt lt delimiter gt Instructs the dialog to wait for the device to which the service has connected to send a string st ring1 If that string is not received within five seconds expect sends the second string st ring2 to the device and waits for a third string st ring3 This continues until an expected string is received within the five second limit or expect runs out of strings To use the expect command follow it with the character that is lt delimiter gt you want to use as the delimiter to separate each string in the list The delimiter can be any character Follow this with the first string you want expect to wait for Then add a delimiter and the string you want expect to send if it does not receive the first string You can add as many strings as you want For instance some devices may not display a login prompt unless you press Enter To have the dialog send a carriage return to the device if it does not receive the login prompt immediately use the expect command If the first character following expect is acomma this sets the comma as the delimiter used to separate strings following the command from each other If you do not place a string between two delimiters this indicates a null string If you have the expect command wait for a null string it considers any string it receives t
271. t to think about database storage There are two ways you can get a good picture of space usage over time e The hogs report The information generated by the dbf ree command Tracking Database Space over Time Using the hogs Command to Obtain Information The hogs command displays how much space particular queues are using in the database It uses this format hogs lt directory or queue name gt To get a hogs report on the People directory type hogs people A screen similar to the following appears USED SHARED HELD LOCKED PURGE QUEUE NAME 0 36 20 0 0 0 PEOPLE LEVY BYLINE 128 20 0 0 0 PEOPLE LEVY FINAL 32 40 0 0 0 PEOPLE LEVY FORM O 425 40 0 0 0 PEOPLE WALTERS NOVEL The USED column contains the number of blocks used in that queue The SHARED column indicates the number of blocks used in that queue that are also used in other queues To get the number of blocks used only by that queue subtract the SHARED count from the USED count If any queue has a substantially greater number of used blocks than the others examine that queue more closely To obtain a hogs report on the entire database type hogs To send a hogs report to a system printer precede the hogs command with print and the number of the system printer you want to use For instance to send the report on the People directory to printer 3 type at the console print 3 hogs people To send a hogs report to yourself type NRCS
272. tabase To reverse the effects of diskclear type diskclear u Arguments Description Clear database Writes to disk cannot be repaired by running diskclear u Read database blocks lt number gt The number of blocks to process at one time 135 Appendix A Command References diskcopy doc ed 136 Arguments Description u Unclear database diskcopy lt of simultaneous copies gt diskcopy lt start block gt lt end blocks diskcopy s Copies database from master computer usually server A to a replacement computer Enter it on the replacement server Select the s parameter to minimize impact on system performance doc glqu lt queue gt lt title gt doc plqu lt queue gt lt file gt title must be one word or enclosed in quotes The g option does not take any file name parameters standard output is assumed If output is to be written into a file shell file redirection must be used as in gt output file name The g option defaults to plain text input output and lines are terminated with CR LF characters The q modifer specifies that the input output will be in NSML format not plain text The u option specifies Linux line termination is used that is lines are terminated with an LF character The p option will take input from its standard input if no files are specified This will put a single story into the database composed of the data read from its stand
273. table below lists available console control commands and their func tions Keyword Explanation bottom Moves you to the newest bottom line in the history computer Selects one or more of your system s servers so that you can type a computer name s command on the selected server s The command may be abbreviated typing c or computer plus the computer name s of the servers you want to select will work Type the command plus an asterisk to select all servers suchasc down number of lines Moves you that many lines forward down in the history keyword P y e down number of lines moves you that many lines forward in the history For example typing down 30 moves you forward 30 lines If you follow down with a number greater than the number of lines between your current position and the last line in the history the down command moves you to the last newest line in the history e down keyword searches forward through the history from your current position for that word For example to search forward for a line containing the word list type down list The down command is not case sensitive If you specify PEOPLE people isa valid match If the system does not find the keyword before reaching the bottom of the history the console beeps and you are returned to the current line e down with no parameter moves you down one line A wildcard character can be used to match any character or to a search for
274. tape number one and insert another tape The server automatically continues copying the database when you insert the second tape Restoring Data to the iNEWS Database The following sections describe how to restore data from tape The dbrestore Command You can use the dbrestore tdv command to verify that you can properly read a dbdump tape Tapes produced with the dbdump command can be read back in and restored using the dbrestore command The most common use of the dbrestore command is to restore a specific queue or directory This is done by specifying the name on the command line NRCS A dbrestore d n lt queuename gt lt queuename gt Check free space before you restore large amounts of data to the database Before you dbrestore stories or queues to your database from tape ensure you have enough free space available to hold the restored stories You can create free space using the dbserver command to empty out some of the Dead queue and add that space to the free list A conservative estimate would be to have 10 free blocks for every story you plan to restore When the i option is used with the dbrestore command dbrestore does not create any index requests in SYSTEM INDEX when stories are restored to indexed queues The dbrestore process is slowed when attempting to create index requests Avid recommends the database be restored using the i option and the stories be re indexed at a later time The dbrestore charact
275. tation where changes were made in that field This information is kept internally but having the MODIFY DEV field makes it visible to users User Passwords Be familiar with valid user accounts on your system Restrict access to these account names to protect against unauthorized outside access User Passwords Your iNEWS newsroom computer system protects against unauthorized access by giving each authorized user a password to log into the system Group security described under Using Group Security to Control System Access on page 39 lets you control specific areas of your database that each user can access Checking Password Status For information on how to check password status from the console see Appendix G A user account without a password is an open door to your system You should always give a user a password when you add the user to your system See the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual for more information on setting up new user accounts However if you suspect that a user does not have a password or has not changed it in awhile you can find out for certain from any iNEWS Workstation To do this log in as a system administrator that is use a superuser account and do the following 31 Chapter 3 Database Security 1 Select Tools gt Options gt Users 2 The Manage User Accounts dialog box appears i Manage User Accounts x User List User ID q Advanced
276. te that stories in SHOW 5PM SCRIPTS should be replaced as new versions are moved or copied to it dbtraits show 5pm scripts u The update trait does not affect stories that are restored from tape If you restore a story to a queue that already contains a version of that story you will have two versions of the same story even if the queue s update trait is on 315 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console Location in Display Mode Option Name SRPlo LIsUGQSXWFiT Keyword General SRP1lo LISUGQSXWFiT g g Spel te Se eee G eet ee SS Queue SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT q q Operations 2 RENSE Allowed 316 Definition Example Indicates whether or not stories in a queue should retain their security restrictions when they are moved to another queue For instance access to stories in the Dead queue would normally be unrestricted To prevent people from opening restricted stories once they are moved to the Dead queue dbtraits dead g Indicates whether or not the kill move or duplicate operations can be performed against an entire queue Setting the trait off for a particular queue does not affect the ability of people to kill move or duplicate individual stories in the queue as long as they have appropriate permissions To allow users to kill move or duplicate the entire SHOW 5PM SCRIPTS queue dbtraits show 5pm scripts q Name Save Version Skip Watch Append Database Traits Console C
277. ted a a do eat diario 321 Changing a Queue s Sort Field 322 Starting the Queue Sort Function from the Console 322 Purge Interval oo nes en ke eR aed Rae RM RS 323 Abstract Printing 00 0 eee eee 324 Abstract Printer 22 00 cacti eee inet eee ee 325 Abstract LINGS eepe do eeta tata weed dda eed A 325 Abstract Style ers ec a ee bn dee bees 326 MaiIDOX ees cee ee na eee bes ad eee ened 326 EAE diss COMMA x ci feted ey Peete daly dbs oe ded bee be ade a 327 Preview Lines 2 00002 eee 327 Refresh ecen eee ee aia aoe eB ey ae ey 328 Managing Group Traits at the Console 20 2000 329 GROUPS te he tacts dh ten Se te Sele age Recetas it wet as 329 Read Group ecdada alie anda aie idee a a 330 Write GOUD ioii canines aiora a gas i Bele anh he RA 330 Notify Group aie arrera ne aas Tob ets ben ed 330 Restricting Access Using Read and Write Limitations 331 Removing Directory or Queue Restrictions 332 Appendix H The Line Editor ed Launching et nereik e ek hee Pea e ed Beet 334 Specifying Lines to Edit 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 334 Searching the File 0 000 c eee es 336 Searching TIPS e ris eiaa a ud eet tiie eee dae erie 336 Editing Commands 0cc044dca0 cnr edg eed deeideuend nce 337 Saving Changes ose e eia e ee E E eee 340 PUNG C0 aieea E ew E See EE eee EY 341 Index Using This Guide Congratulations on your p
278. that rundown to immediately see changes made by others To automatically refresh a queue your system must spend a long time monitoring workstations where users are viewing that queue Using the refresh option on too many queues simultaneously greatly increases the amount of work your system has to do and may severely degrade its overall performance Managing Group Traits at the Console Groups There are three primary group traits used to apply groups to queues and directories in the database Read Write and Notify The list d v console command lists each queue s assigned read write and notification groups These groups restrict who can read or write stories in the queue and indicate who is notified when stories change in it Each group is explained individually in the following sections To list group information for a queue at the console use list d g lt queue name gt To list all queues in the database with a particular group assigned as their read write or notification group at the console use list rwng lt group name gt qd 329 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console 330 Read Group To set a queue s read group use dbtraits lt queue name gt rg lt group name gt For instance to assign a read group of producers to the queue SHOW 5PM type dbtraits show 5pm rg producers To list all queues in the database with a particular group assigned as their read group use list rg lt group name gt
279. the Console Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console Viewing User Traits from the Console 296 From the console use the List u v command to get user trait information The console will display a verbose list of user accounts To get information about a single user follow the command with the User ID of the specific user For instance if you wanted to access the user account danielmi the command would look like this list u v danielmi The result of the command will look something like this user rr kb su m SOEKCVTH sc queues danielmi 180 0 n i OEKCVTH sc dest PEOPLE D DANIELMI NOTES home PEOPLE D DANIELMI mail PEOPLE D DANIELMI MAIL NRCS AS The first line of the display lists the traits the other lines list specific values for the traits The following is the interpretation of the sample command results previuosly displayed e User danielmi has a read rate rr of 180 e The keyboard preference kb is 0 The user is a superuser su The n means news superuser A minus would appear if the user is not a superuser The edit mode m is insert e The traits indicated by SOEKCVTH and sc are explained in the User Traits Summary on page 305 See also list u on page 144 e The users destination queue is PEOPLE D DANIELMI NOTES e The users home directory is PEOPLE D DANIELMI e The users mail queue is PEOPLE D DANIELMI MAIL User Traits Console Command Summa
280. the failed server has been cleared the server can be reconnected to the survivor and the master database copied back across from the survivor Because one server s database will be selected as the master database and the other s database erased discovering a disconnect as soon as possible minimizes the possibility of data loss In normal dual server operation half the devices and sessions are configured on one server and the other half are configured on the other server The most important thing to do after a disconnect is to reconfigure The steps are covered in more detail in the next section Procedures on page 85 Procedures Disconnect Recovery the survivor so that it knows it must be responsible for all devices and sessions You can then restart any network devices that were running on the failed server The disconnect recovery steps are as follows 1 Reconfigure the system survivor 2 Restart the failed servers s network devices PCU MCSPCs on the survivor Reboot the failed server Clear the database on the failed server Reconnect the failed server Copy the database to the failed server NINH nA A Q Log out and stop the failed server s transferred network devices sessions and servers running on the survivor o0 Reconfigure the system 9 Start up the transferred network devices and servers back on the failed server This section contains an example of recovery from a
281. the pound sign exclamation point and asterisk they must be enclosed within quotation marks 149 Appendix A Command References offline online otod 150 If you remove a user who has unread messages those messages remain in the database You can remove them using the msgclean command followed by rd For instance to remove the pending messages for all users that have been removed from the system type msgclean rd You can substitute the name of a removed user for the to remove only the messages for that user offline silent Puts iNEWS offline Users cannot log in but users already on the system can continue normal function The silentoption suppresses diagnostics for network connections that are refused because the system is offline Bothnxserver and workserver typically generate these diagnostics The datastamp generator server timer includes an indication that the system is offline in the timestamp messages produced on the console This provides feedback that the system is offline when the silentoption was specified The status command will print OFFLINE silent when the system is offline with the silent option turned on You can keep the system offline and turn off the silent option by reentering the offline command without the silent option online Puts iNEWS online Users can log in and use the system otod lt number gt otod Command Options leading 0 Octal le
282. tially 309 type a string 175 type dialog command 175 U unbusying a story 99 Dead queue 100 edit lock 100 order lock 100 Unity for News 10 up console control command 119 user activity tracking 35 39 user passwords setting and changing 31 user traits list u v command 296 password restrictions 35 summary of 304 users cannot read or write stories 98 last password change 34 listing log ins 37 unable to log in 96 Users Without Passwords option 33 utraits console command 160 changing a user s password 34 V validate job list command 169 verbose command getting detailed information 310 verifying a backup tape 59 version console command 161 view console control command 119 W W_LOGTYPES value 38 wait dialog command 176 wholockedit command 162 wire ports 101 wire problems 101 wiredump console command 162 workstation problems 96 write protect tab on tapes 56 X x console control command 119 xon xoff flow control 103 Z zoom console control command 120 Index 353 Index 354
283. ting back online 92 mes dictionary driver errors 246 247 mct driver errors 246 shared error messages 246 status reports 247 message dialog command 21 174 messages broadcast 120 minus four option 102 modem console control command 118 modems resetting for a wire 102 MODIFY DEV field 30 monitoring free space 42 44 monitoring the free list 43 move job list command 165 msgclean console command 150 msgmailalert 280 N netstat i 84 108 network failure 107 network services adding 23 adding Linux 25 number job list command 165 number of blocks list 123 Index nxserver 291 O Oerrs output errors 108 offline command 150 on job list command 166 online command 150 open job list command 166 order job list command 166 order lock unbusying 100 otod console command 151 out of space condition 44 output errors Oerrs 108 P pass dialog command 174 passwords checking 304 checking for users without 31 forcing change 34 listing change by date 302 304 listing last change 34 301 required minimum length 30 restrictions 35 security procedures 30 setting and changing for users 31 status 31 pause command 174 PCU back panel 253 ccumsgs dictionary 213 ccureset command 152 introduction 250 peripheral controller unit See PCU picolor 282 ping testing connectivity 107 piping with fgrep 105 349 Index polarity 103 policies for backups 56 poll job list command 167 power failure 106 print command 118 152 P
284. tion 12 Linux commands available 115 overview 11 input errors errs 109 J job list command at 163 bscan 163 164 167 distribution 164 dup 164 every 164 fullform 169 ignore 165 ignore del 165 local 165 move 165 number 165 on 166 open 166 order 166 put 167 quiet 167 remote 168 remove 168 replace 168 348 scan 168 send del 169 source 169 validate 169 L Last Login option 36 line formatting heol command 174 Linus commands 115 list console control command 117 list d command syntax 142 143 list g command syntax 143 list q command 143 syntax 143 list s command 144 list u command 96 144 304 syntax 144 list u v command user traits 296 listing all computers 121 listing contents of a tape 59 listing last password change 301 listing password change by date 302 304 listing users logged in 37 loading tapes 56 local job list command 165 locked blocks checking for 105 locked stories removing 127 logclose console control command 117 logging in users unable to 96 logins recording 38 logopen console control command 117 logout command 118 146 low on space message 43 low water mark free list 43 mailboxes assigning to queues 327 listing all queues at console 327 maintaining database storage 48 53 makeccutab console command 147 makeshift command 242 maketab console command 149 making tape backups 156 map dialog command 173 mapin dialog command 173 mapout dialog command 173 master computer put
285. to the master computer typically server A 2 Select the master computer 3 Enter superuser mode 4 Type sitedump This takes a few minutes and no messages are displayed Backing up System Site Files Linux systems can make sitedumps to their floppy drives The floppy diskette does not need to be formatted first Insert a 1 44 MB diskette in the system and type sitedump f dev fd0 5 When the sitedump is done and the prompt returns exit from superuser mode by pressing Ctrl D 6 Remove the tape and label it Include the date and type of backup 77 Chapter 5 Backing Up the iNEWS System 78 Chapter 6 Disconnects This chapter provides vital information to help you recover from a system disconnect This chapter contains the following main sections e Normal System Status e Disconnects e Disconnect Recovery Chapter 6 Disconnects Normal System Status The displays will vary On a dual server system the status command will show the system is AB when the system is a with both servers connected to each other A display similar to the tiple system following will appear on server A configuration NRCS A status A is ONLINE and has been CONFIGURED ID is NRCS System is AB Master is A Disk status is OK The database is OPEN The system status is reported identically on both servers in the system For instance a display similar to the following will appear on server B NRCS B
286. to which the service has connected or until a certain amount of time specified by a timer command has elapsed with no response To use this command follow it with the string for which the dialog should wait If you use wait without a parameter the dialog waits until any character is received Unless a timer command has been executed first the wait command waits forever until the specified string is received so type exactly the string you want it to wait for and keep in mind that wait is case sensitive If the dialog never receives the string wait is looking for the dialog hangs and you need to use the quit connect command to exit the dialog and return to your INEWS Workstation Appendix B System Files This appendix contains samples of system files you are most likely to reference or change e e ete dhcpd conf etc hosts site config site printers hplaser 1 site system site wires anpa7 console cfg SYSTEM CLIENT WINDOWS SYSTEM CONFIGURE 301 ACTION SYSTEM MAP SYSTEM RESOURCE SYSTEM WIRES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM WIRES KEYWORDS SYSTEM WIRES KEYWORDS AP SYSTEM WIRES KEYWORDS AP2 Appendix B System Files letc dhcpd conf PCU entry starts here MCSPC entry starts here letc hosts 178 allow bootp ignore unknown clients not authoritative ddns update style none subnet 172 24 96 0 netmask 255 255 254 0 host pcul0 hardware ethernet 00 d0 b7 4b 52 f8 fixed address 172 24 96 53
287. trol ZS ystemRoot system32 as2 dil 2S ystemRoot spstem32 5 ystemR oot D PROGR 486 486 Family 6 Model 1 Stepping 6 Genuinelntel g 0106 ZSystemRoot ProductOptions SecurePipeServers SecurityProviders erviceGroupOrder erviceProvider ession Manager C AppPatches DOS Devices 4 Environment Executive 4 FileRenameOperations E KnownDLls J Memory Management E SubSystems SessionManager Setup SystemResources TimeZonelntormation Update VirtualD eviceDrivers s s Si Key String Value Binary selia xli Environment Variables Registry Values 4 Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new Registry value of type DWORD in the Registry Editor 5 Type the name of the new value CCColor 6 Press Enter 7 To set the Value data option gt Right click on the CCColor value gt Choose Modify from the pop up menu The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears Edit DWORD Value Value name ECColor i Hexadecimal Value data r Base C Decimal Cancel gt Set the Value data using the following hexadecimal format 0x00RRGGBB where RR GG BB are two bytes for each color The leftmost two bytes 00 are not used Also If the CCColor has its value set to zero 0 the closed captioning text will be black because zero corresponds to the color Black gt Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box 8 Close the Registry Editor
288. ts file Normally put a hyphen in this position of the service line to force the service to search each server until it finds one that has a resource it can use If you want the service to use a dialog put the dialog name in this position of the service line Otherwise fill this position with a hyphen Name of the resource that you want the service to use You can restrict who can use the service by specifying a user group If you do not want to restrict access place a hyphen in this position Specifies the command you want the service to use to handle communication To create a service that establishes a network connection type the telnet command here Ensure you specify the program s full pathname and include the system name to which you are connecting You will need one such service line for each server on your system Use the rlogin command in the following way usr bin rlogin lt servername gt 1 lt username gt The following sample entries in SYSTEM SERVICE let you establish a network connection to your console from an iNEWS Workstation ses sion a console console sysops usr bin rlogin nrcs a 1 so b console console sysops usr bin rlogin nrcs 8 1 so 25 Chapter 2 Connect Services See the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual for more information on selecting servers and the superuser mode 26 10 The resource assigned to the service must be configured
289. u can see what the dialog is doing as it executes Usually you want the diagnostic mode on only when you are debugging a dialog so you can determine exactly where any errors occur Place a diag on command in the dialog at the point where you want to start debugging To see what happens during just one part of a dialog bracket that portion of the dialog with diag onand diag off commands echo on off Turns local echo on or off Turn on local echo in any dialog used to connect to a device or information service that does not echo back what the user enters This way the user can see what he or she is entering To turn on local echo place echo on in the dialog where you want local echo turned on Use this command at or near the beginning of the dialog While you can turn local echo off using the echo off command you are not required to do so Local echo is turned off automatically when the dialog finishes escape lt escape character gt To change the escape character used to bring up the cmd gt prompt from within a dialog use the escape command For instance to change the escape character from the default Ctrl to Ctrl Z use the escape command Represent the Ctrl Z character as lt 26 gt its decimal value Do not change the escape character to Ctrl A Ctrl Q or Ctrl S These characters have other important functions 171 Appendix A Command References expect heol 172 The escape character is rese
290. u want to review the entire log you can use the doc command to place a copy in a queue you specify For instance using the previous example the sequence of commands shown in bold may appear similar to the following 49 Chapter 4 Database Management You must use 24 hour military time NRCS A at 11 10 exc dblines gt tmp dblines log doc pu people sysadmin notes tmp dblines log lt Ctr1 D gt jop 1001340600 a at Sat Jul 10 11 10 00 2004 NRCS A In the example the system would execute the dblines command at 11 10 send the results to a log file called dblines 1og and then place a copy of that file in the PEOPLE SYSADMIN NOTES As indicated by the pound sign in the prompt you must be in superuser mode to execute the commands Cleaning the Database Over the course of a month the iNEWS database may develop minor errors in its structure the overall organization in which individual stories are arranged These errors are the result of normal database cycles in which old material is removed and new information is added These errors grow and begin to damage the database if you do not remove them The database cleanup procedure identifies errors so you can repair them before they become harmful Unless you are instructed to perform this procedure more often do a database cleanup once a month Cleaning Your Database Offline 50 The database cleanup procedure using the dbvisit command requires you to bri
291. ue for a queue s display lines trait depends on which is more important displaying as many stories as possible at one time or showing a large portion of each story For instance in a rundown queue it is important to display as many stories on the screen at a time as possible so the display lines trait is usually set to one line per story In queues where people often browse such as those in the Wires directory display a small part of each story Stories in a queue display are usually separated by a blank line The only exception is any queue that displays one line per story such as a rundown queue Stories in these queues are not separated from each other Type the display command to temporarily change the number of lines displayed per story for a queue you are viewing This change applies only to a single user s workstation and lasts only while the queue is being viewed Refresh To set the queue refresh trait at the console use dbtraits lt queue name gt refresh refresh Managing Group Traits at the Console To turn on this trait for a queue use refresh to turn it off use refresh For instance to turn on the refresh trait in RUNDOWNS 5PM type dbtraits rundowns 5pm refresh Queues with refresh turned on display R in the preview lines column of list d output Use this trait only on important queues like rundowns that more than one person may modify simultaneously This allows everyone working on
292. ueue name gt Removes edit and order locks from the specified queue in your database The i option allows you to ignore the inverted database trait If a user is actually working in the file removing the lock could cause data loss 159 Appendix A Command References utraits Superuser only 160 utraits lt username gt lt option gt lt value gt flag utraits Command Options destination realname editmode su keyboard home readrate password mail The bloblist option is useful for removing iNEWS Workstation user preferences should they become corrupted utraits Command Flags b Blacklist ka Kill all bloblist Remove blob list log Log client server communication c Connect o Order cc Configure colors s simplified user interface cs Configure shortcut toolbar td Technical direct er Enter and remove vb Video browse hr Highlight read Sets a user s traits For instance to assign keyboard 12 to user Jones type utraits jones keyboard 12 The lt username gt can be all a pattern or a user name You can enclose the real name in quotation marks to allow for embedded spaces Use lt string gt to indicate wildcards For instance a applies to all users with names starting with the letter A version Console Server Commands version lt alternate pattern gt lt filename gt version Displays the version and platform of the iNEWS software you are using Type version A
293. urchase of an Avid iNEWS newsroom computer system It is a vital part of the Avid Unity for News system solution that integrates with other Avid systems and third party equipment to provide an ideal nonlinear workflow and optimize the news production process This manual provides information on how to manage the iNEWS newsroom computer system consisting of e Aconsole e One or more servers e Various clients such as iNEWS Workstations and printers The documentation describes software features and hardware related to the iNEWS newsroom computer system which is extremely customizable Your system may not contain certain features and or parts that are mentioned in the documentation Who Should Use This Manual This manual is written for system administrators who are managing the iNEWS newsroom computer system NRCS It is strongly recommended that system administrators have prior experience in or classroom knowledge of Red Hat Linux system administration All iINEWS system administrators need to e Manage user accounts security and permissions Start up and shut down iNEWS NRCS e Perform file system maintenance backup and recovery Using This Guide e Maintain disks e Monitor processes Configure and monitor the network About This Manual This manual is part of a two book set designed to keep pace with current advances in the Avid system s news production capabilities The set made up of this book and the Avid iNEWS S
294. urge dis mbox directory R I Q X TITLE P4 0 D1 WIRES ALL A hyphen in the second line indicates that trait identified above it is off For instance the first trait in the header an S represents a sequentially ordered directory or queue Because the second line has a hyphen below the Sequential trait indicator the s means that WIRES ALL is alphabetically rather than sequentially ordered 309 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console Another trait indicated as on for WIRES ALL is the one represented by the letter I This trait is Inverted which means this queue displays the most recent stories at the top SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory sRo 65L O xK gt TITLE P4 0 D1 WIRES ALL Getting Detailed Information 310 To obtain a more detailed information about a directory or queue add the verbose command such as list d v followed by the queue or directory name For instance to list information about the queue called RUNDOWNS 5PM type list d v rundowns 5pm A screen similar to the following appears SRP1o LISUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge ap al as dis mbox RUNDOWNS 5PM QSRP U Q TITLE PO A000 000 000 D1 220 rg castread wg castwrite ng queue form MCS RUNDOWN story form MCS RUNDOWN The first letter Q in the line under the queue name indicates that RUNDOWNS 5PM is a queue The ap near the end of the header line stands
295. value use list as lt style number gt d To set this trait use dbtraits lt queue name gt as lt abstract style value gt For instance to set WIRES STATE to print abstracts with style 3 type dbtraits wires states as 3 You can select any style defined in SYSTEM STYLES The format of the abstract style information is SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT sortfield ap al as dis directory Q TITLE A000 000 000 D1 WIRES STATE If a mailbox is assigned to a queue the number representing that mailbox appears in the mbox column of the list d display The format of the mailbox information is SRP1o LISUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory Q RP I QSXW TITLE P3 0 D1 WIRES ALL The dis Column Database Traits Console Command Summary To list all queues in the database with a particular mailbox use list mail lt mailbox number gt d To assign a mailbox to a queue use dbtraits lt queue name gt mail lt mailbox number gt lt reserved mailbox name gt For instance to assign mailbox 103 to the queue WIRES KEYWORDS HOCKEY type dbtraits wires keywords hockey mail 103 The dis column of the list d output represents two traits in one column the preview lines trait formerly known as display lines and the refresh trait The format of the preview lines information at the console is SRPlo LISUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory Q RP I QSXW TITLE P3 0 D1 WIRES ALL The preview
296. ve owners Footage Arizona Images KNTV Production Courtesy of Granite Broadcasting Inc Editor Producer Bryan Foote Canyonlands Courtesy of the National Park Service Department of the Interior WCAU Fire Story Courtesy of NBC 10 Philadelphia PA Women in Sports Paragliding Courtesy of Legendary Entertainment Inc Avid iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Operations and Troubleshooting Manual Part 0130 06340 01 Rev B 25 October 2004 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Contents Using This Guide Who Should Use This Manual 2 000 e eee eee 1 About This Manual aa a o a ee eee 2 Symbols and Conventions 000 c ee eae 3 lI You Need Help ri 6004 toate pada dek a l deaea eae aged 4 With the Syntax of Console Commands 00 5 Related Information 000 cece eee eee eee 6 If You Have Documentation Comments 2 2 20005 6 How to Order Documentation 0 0002 cece 7 Avid Educational Services 00 0c eee eee eee eee 7 Introduction What is Avid Unity for NEWS 0 20 000 000 ee eee 10 INEWS NRCS ic ae ee ana e daa a laa odes E amp 11 Third Party Connectivity and Open Integration 12 System Administrator Tasks 1 0 2 2 0000 e eee eae 13 BASIC ASKS seca amp seco thee nse cuts caine ite a an eee O nei E Sere oe tes 13 User Tasks sacs oto ene aa ee bad ohne a te acces oes 14 Database
297. vice gt lt resource name gt lt device name gt Parameter device resource name device name Description Identifies resource s device number Name you want to give to the resource Network resources can share the same name services choose the first available resource of the correct kind In the following example we call the resource net Resource s device name If you do not want to give it a name put a hyphen in this position For instance our new network resource configuration line would look like this resource 220 net net connect 4 Add the service to the service table in the database Each service installed in your system is defined on a separate line in your system s service table which is the first story in SYSTEM SERVICE Each service defined in the service table consists of a few parameters that determine how the service behaves It does not matter where in the service table you add the new line Adding System Services A service line has six parameters in this general format lt service gt lt host gt lt dialog gt lt resource gt lt group gt lt command gt The following table contains information on service line formats Parameter service host dialog resource group command Definition Name you want the service to have Name of the server where you want the service to look for its resource List the target server s name in your system s etc hos
298. ware and site file backups Avid recommends separate backups be made on each iNEWS Server Later in this chapter various procedures are provided for checking data on tapes searching for specific data on tapes and restoring data from tapes For more information see Listing Tape Contents and Backup Dates on page 65 and Searching a Tape on page 68 Establishing Policies for Backup Procedures 56 Since your software and system files change infrequently you do not need to back them up very often Your database however changes hundreds or even thousands of times every day so they need more frequent backups Avid recommends your station establish and following a local backup policy for each type of data in your INEWS system Backing up the iNEWS Database The following are some general backup guidelines Since the database is mirrored across multiple servers you have built in hardware redundancy Backups also provide some protection against the rare cases of database corruption One approach is weekly backups rotating through 5 tapes one for each week of the month If you need to keep old data for a period of time you may supplement the five tape rotation with 12 more tapes labeled with the months in the year Do not store archived material beneath daily show production queues Segregate archive material under it s own directory If you archive old shows on your system you may want to produce dbdump tapes that cover
299. wing main sections e Tape Operations Backing up the iNEWS Database e Restoring Data to the iNEWS Database e Disaster Recovery Planning e Backing up Software e Backing up System Site Files Chapter 5 Backing Up the iNEWS System Tape Operations When making backup tapes pay particular attention to the write protect tab on the tape If you have trouble writing to the tape check the tab and try moving it in the opposite direction When loading a tape ensure the tape has finished loading before issuing tape commands Trying to access the tape before it is ready may result ina hung process that waits forever for the tape to be ready The only solution is a reboot For DAT tapes wait at least a minute after all tape activity lights cease blinking to be sure the tape is properly loaded Always clearly label tapes with the type of backup tape it is date it was produced and command used to produce it Ensure that your tapes can be found quickly in case of emergency Since the database is mirrored on all servers in your system it does not matter on which server you produce the database backup tape You may want to rotate which server does the database tape dump so the tape drives wear evenly and you extend the life of the drives Alternatively you may want to always run the backup on one server s drive so you have another relatively unused drive standing by in case the heavily used drive develops problems However for soft
300. y Editor window Environmental Variables for Servers You can control some of the behavior of rxnet by putting some enviroment variable settings inthe site env nxserver file Ifthe site env nxserver file or its parent directory site env do not exist you need to create the directory using the mkdir site env command before you can edit the file Contact Avid Customer Support if you need assistance with this procedure The specific variables are e e e RXDEBUG lt level gt RXDEBUGFILE lt filename gt RXSITELISTSZ lt size gt RXSITEFORMAT lt format gt RXSEPFIELDLIST lt filename gt 291 Appendix F Environment Variables e RXSITEIDLE lt seconds gt e RXOLDNLST 1 292 Environmental Variables for Servers RXDEBUG lt level gt An rxdebug level of 2 produces the command traffic to from rxnet RXDEBUGFILE lt filename gt The RXDEBUGFILE file allows you to cause rxnet diagnostics to be put into lt filename gt lt process id gt instead of the console RXSITELISTSZ lt size gt The list size controls the number of stories included in a queue list when rxnet responds to an FTP list command The default value for this is 300 RXSITEFORMAT lt format gt The format controls which transfer protocol is initially used This can be set tonsml or sep The default is nsm1 This is how you get a foreign application such as CNN which operates in sep but did not use the FTP SITE command to change the format to sep RXS
301. y programs and sessions eventually need to run in their normal place on the revived server Two methods are available for splitting the workload and putting things back in their normal places The first method involves logging off and stopping half of the system The second method is easier and involves briefly logging off all users and stopping all devices If you cannot afford to log all users off for 10 minutes or so the first step to transferring them back to their rightful place is to determine which devices and sessions belong on the revived server Those devices and sessions must be logged out and then stopped Utility programs such as action servers and txnet links PCUs and MCSPCs need not be logged out they can be stopped directly NRCS A stop lt number gt Consult the appropriate host section of the site config file to see which devices must be transferred back to their normal locations Before stopping them take the system offline to prevent new logins then type Method 2 Disconnect Recovery list s to see whether users are logged in on the session numbers that must be stopped These users must log out for a few minutes Log them out then stop the devices and servers NRCS AS offline NRCS AS list s 10 P11 P12 T15 palmer D16 NRCS AS logout 10 NRCS AS stop 10 gt DPPP Only iNEWS Workstation sessions need to be logged out they need not be restarted since users initiate the sessions when they login
302. you can find out whether a specific user is currently logged in To see a list of all logged in users 1 Select Communicate gt Messages gt Logged In Users You need to be sending a new message to use this function Begin a new message to anyone to obtain access to the menu items in this step A dialog box appears with a list of users currently logged in 2 Click OK when you are done looking at the list To determine whether a specific user is logged in 1 Select the Message bar galal el 4a 2 Type the user name in the To field 3 Move cursor to the message field using the mouse or Tab key 4 One of three symbols appears to the left of the To field depending on what you type in the To text box If the user is currently logged in an icon of connected cables appears to Y the left of the user name If the user is not currently logged in an icon of disconnected cables R appears to the left of the user name If there is no such user name in the system a question mark appears to f the left of the user name 37 Chapter 3 Database Security Recording Logins The letters are the same ones that appear in the first column of a list s orlist c display for these device types 38 Keep track of successful and attempted logins to preserve system security You can spot unauthorized users people logging in at odd hours or repeated attempts to guess passwords To monitor logins from different types of
303. you how to use the dbrestore command to list the directories and queues that have been backed up on a tape to find out if the tape contains any stories saved after a certain date and to find out the date of each backup on the tape Listing Contents of a Tape To list every directory and queue on the tape as well as the number of stories in each queue to the server with the tape drive type dbrestore tdv 65 Chapter 5 Backing Up the iNEWS System 66 Information similar to the following appears Listing tape contents only Type Stories Name Dir Que DEAD Dir SYSTEM Dir SYSTEM KEYBOARDS Que 3 TEST SMITH 3630 stories listed Each line in the list consists of three columns and identifies a directory ora queue that has been saved to the tape The Type column indicates whether the line lists information about a directory or a queue Directories are identified by Dir and queues by Que e The Stories column is used only in lines beginning with Que and identifies how many stories are in that queue Use this number as a guide to how much space you need to restore the queue If there is no number the queue is empty The queue is empty because either no stories existed in the queue or the queue s skip flag was enabled The Name column identifies the directory or queue by name If you attempt to restore a queue with no stories you see the following message no stories restored Listing It
304. ything the user enters in a story is inserted at the current cursor position moving the following text over Example utraits palmer editmode i Overwrite editmode o Everything the user enters in a story overwrites the character under the cur sor This is the default Example utraits hansen editmode o Home home Sets the user s home directory which usually contains the user s Mail and Notes queues Example utraits loyd home people 1l loyd 305 Appendix G Managing Traits at the Console Name in Modify Utrait Console Definition Example User Account Command dialog box Destination destination Specifies the user s destination which is usually a queue he or she uses fre quently such as the Notes queue Example utraits loyd destination people 1 loyd notes Mail mail Specifies the user s Mail queue where any mail addressed to that user is placed Example utraits loyd mail people loyd mail Read Rate readrate The user s spoken reading rate in words per minute The system uses the readrate of the designated presenter to determine the audio air time of a story Example utraits vandenberg readrate 180 User Name realname The user s real name as contrasted with their account s User ID name For instance John Chapman may have a User ID of j chapman his real name is John Chapman Video Browse vb vb Specifies user can search the video server Example utraits palme

command - Avid Technology

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents